1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/ar/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
49 \AtBeginDocument{\setdefaultlanguage[numerals=maghrib]{arabic}} %%%% without this line nomenclature list not appear in pdf.
50 %\renewcommand{\nomname}{المصطلحات}%% used arabic title for nomname
51 \newcommand\lettergroup[1]{} % without this line "unknown english letters" appear in the index list in pdf.
53 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
54 \use_default_options false
59 \maintain_unincluded_children false
60 \language arabic_arabi
61 \language_package default
64 \font_roman "lmodern" "Scheherazade"
65 \font_sans "lmss" "Scheherazade"
66 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "Scheherazade"
67 \font_math "auto" "auto"
68 \font_default_family default
69 \use_non_tex_fonts true
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format pdf4
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command default
84 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
85 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
89 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
90 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
91 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
96 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
97 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
100 \use_package amsmath 1
101 \use_package amssymb 1
102 \use_package cancel 1
104 \use_package mathdots 1
105 \use_package mathtools 1
106 \use_package mhchem 1
107 \use_package stackrel 1
108 \use_package stmaryrd 1
109 \use_package undertilde 1
111 \cite_engine_type default
115 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation skip
140 \math_numbering_side default
145 \paperpagestyle default
146 \tracking_changes false
147 \output_changes false
156 دليل مستخدم ليك \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
198 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
199 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
212 \begin_layout Standard
213 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
214 LatexCommand tableofcontents
221 \begin_layout Chapter
225 \begin_layout Section
226 ما هو ليك \SpecialChar LyX
230 \begin_layout Standard
231 ليك هو نظام إعداد وثائق.
232 إنه أداة لإنتاج المخطوطات الجميلة والكتب القابلة للنشر، خطابات الأعمال
233 والمقترحات، وحتى الشعر.
234 وهو يختلف عن معظم "معالجات الكلمات" بأنه يستخدم نموذج لغة الترميز كأسلوب
236 وهذا يعني أنه عند كتابة عنوان القسم، ووضع علامة عليه ك "قسم" فإنه سيقوم
237 باختيار الحجم واللون والمحاذاة تلقائيا بالصورة المثالية المتعارف عليها،
238 ولا يحتاج أن تحدد له "خط ثخين، حجمه 17pt ، محاذاة يسار، ...".
239 ليك يعتني بالتنضيد لأجلك.
240 لذلك يمكنك التركيز فقط على محتوى كتابك، وليس على آلية التنضيد.
243 \begin_layout Standard
244 وهذه الفلسفة تم شرحها بمزيد من التفصيل في كتيب المقدمة.
245 إذا كنت لم تقرأه بعد، فأنت بالتأكيد تحتاج إلى ذلك.
246 نعم، نحن نعني الآن من فضلك.
249 \begin_layout Standard
250 كتيب المقدمة يصف عدة أشياء بالإضافة إلى فلسفة ليك: الأشياء الأكثر أهمية،
252 إذا كنت لم تقرأه، سيكون عليك تخصيص جزء من وقتك لتصفحه.
253 وربما يكون من الأفضل الاطلاع بشكل سريع على بقية كتيبات المساعدة.
257 \begin_layout Section
258 كيف يبدو ليك \SpecialChar LyX
262 \begin_layout Standard
263 مثل معظم التطبيقات، ليك لديه شريط القوائم المألوف في الجزء العلوي من النافذة.
264 وتحته شريط الأدوات مع مربع القائمة المنسدلة وأزرار مختلفة.
265 هناك، بطبيعة الحال، شريط التمرير الرأسي ومنطقة عمل رئيسية لتحرير الوثائق.لاحظ
266 أنه لا يوجد شريط تمرير أفقي.
267 هذا ليس خطأ أو سهو، ولكنه مقصود.
268 فعند قراءتك كتاب، تتوقع نهاية السطر لتنتقل للسطر التالي.
269 لكن النص في ليك يتوزع على الصفحات بطريقة عمودية، وبالتالي نحتاج إلى شريط
271 إن هناك ثلاث حالات قد تجعلنا نرغب بشريط التمرير الأفقي.
272 الحالة الأولى هي الصور الكبيرة.
273 ولتجنب عرضها أكبر من الشاشة، انقر بزر الفارة الأيمن على الصورة واستخدام
274 الخيار على مقاس الشاشة في علامة التبويب خيارات لتيك و ليك.
275 الحالات الثانية والثالثة هي الجداول والمعادلات التي هي أوسع من نافذة ليك.
276 يمكنك استخدام مفاتيح الأسهم للتمرير أفقيا من خلال الجدول، ولكن هذا لا يعمل
277 مع للمعادلات حتى الآن.
280 \begin_layout Standard
281 للحصول على وصف موجز لجميع قوائم ليك وأشرطة الأدوات ، ألقِ نظرة على الملحق
286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
288 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
295 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 يتكون نظام المساعدة من كتيبات ليك.
301 ويمكنك قراءة جميع الكتيبات من داخل ليك.
302 وما عليك سوى اختيار كتيب الذي تريد قراءته من قائمة مساعدة.
305 \begin_layout Section
306 الإعدادات الأساسية لليك \SpecialChar LyX
308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
310 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 معظم مميزات ليك يمكن ضبطها من خلال قائمة
320 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
325 \begin_inset Index idx
328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
334 ليك قادر على فحص نظامك لمعرفة البرامج المتوفرة عليه، مثل حزم لتيك وأنواع
336 إنه يساعدك على استخدم هذه المعلومات لإعداد التفضيلات الافتراضية المثالية
338 على الرغم من أن ليك يقوم بهذه العملية آليا عند تركيبه لأول مره.
339 ومن المستحسن القيام بعملية إعادة الضبط
341 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
344 إعادة ضبط النظام كل فترة،
345 \begin_inset Index idx
348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
354 لأن حزم لتيك تتحدث كل فترة، ويجب أن لا ننسى إعادة تشغيل ليك بعد إعادة الضبط
358 \begin_layout Section
359 إعداد لتيك \SpecialChar LaTeX
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 تستطيع تحرير مستند \SpecialChar LyX
372 بدون تركيب \SpecialChar LaTeX
373 ، لكنك لن تستطيع إنتاج ملفات PDF أو طباعة
375 إن بعض مستندات \SpecialChar LyX
376 تستخدم DocBook وأمثاله كخلفية لإنتاج ملفات PDF .
377 وكل مستند \SpecialChar LyX
378 يمكن تصديره كملف نصي بسيط أو صفحة ويب تفاعلية XHTML .
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 بعض أنواع المستندات ربما تعتمد على حزم خاصة من \SpecialChar LaTeX
384 ومع هذا بعض المستندات يمكن استخدامها حتى بدون تركيب الحزم المطلوبة، لكنك
385 بالتأكيد لن تستطيع إنتاج أو تصديرها إلى أي نوع من الملفات.
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 حزم \SpecialChar LaTeX
390 الموجودة على النظام يمكن مشاهدتها في \SpecialChar LyX
393 مساعدة\SpecialChar menuseparator
395 إذا افتقدت حزم تحتاجها، فإن عليك تركيبها ثم إعادة ضبط
400 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
404 \begin_inset Index idx
407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
417 جديدة في كتيب التخصيص لتعرف معلومات أكثر عن تركيب حزم
423 \begin_layout Chapter
424 كيف تعمل مع \SpecialChar LyX
428 \begin_layout Section
430 \begin_inset Index idx
433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
442 \begin_layout Standard
443 تحت قائمة ملف وفي شريط الأدوات القياسي توجد العمليات الأساسية التي تراها
444 في أي معالج كلمات بالإضافة إلى بعض العمليات المتقدمة:
447 \begin_layout Itemize
469 \begin_layout Itemize
485 arg "buffer-new-template"
491 \begin_layout Itemize
513 \begin_layout Itemize
523 \begin_layout Itemize
537 \begin_layout Itemize
559 \begin_layout Itemize
571 arg "buffer-write-as"
577 \begin_layout Itemize
587 \begin_layout Itemize
601 \begin_layout Standard
602 يمكننا أن نقوم بالكثير من الأشياء الجميلة بالشكل الذي نقوم به في معالجات
603 الكلمات الأخرى.، مع بعض الاختلافات البسيطة.
606 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
615 قالب يعرض قائمة بالقوالب المتاحة.
616 وعند اختيار قالب معين سوف يتم آليا تعيين خصائص النسق الخاص به للمستند،
617 إن هذه الخصائص كان عليك تعديلها يدويا لكن
623 فربما تستخدم نوع معين من المستندات، وخصوصا كتابة الرسائل (أنظر قسم
626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
628 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
637 \begin_layout Standard
640 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
673 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
674 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
675 is just that — a big, blank space.
683 \begin_layout Standard
684 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
689 \begin_inset Quotes fld
693 \begin_inset Quotes frd
697 \begin_inset Quotes fld
701 \begin_inset Quotes frd
705 إلا إذا طلبت من \SpecialChar LyX
706 إنشاء ملف جديد أو فتح ملف موجود.
714 \begin_layout Standard
734 الإصدار عملية لكثير من الناس الذين يعملون على نفس المستند وفي نفس الوقت.
740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
741 إذا كنت تخطط لعمل هذا، فإن عليك الخروج من ميزة تحكم الإصدار في \SpecialChar LyX
743 اقرأ كتيب خصائص إضافية.
759 للمحفوظ سوف تعيد تحميل المستند من القرص الصلب.
760 أنت تستطيع استخدامه أيضا إذا ندمت على تعديل المستند وأردت الرجوع لآخر حفظ.
769 الإصدار تستطيع تسجيل التعديلات التي صنعتها في مستند معين وبهذا يستطيع الآخرين
773 \begin_layout Section
774 عمليات التحرير الأساسية
775 \begin_inset Index idx
778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
787 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
794 \begin_layout Standard
795 مثل معظم معالجات النصوص الحديثة، \SpecialChar LyX
796 يستطيع القيام بعمليات قص ولصق مقاطع نصية،
797 ويستطيع نقل كلمات أو نصوص، ويستطيع حذف الكلمات والحروف طبعا.
798 الأقسام الأربعة التالية تغطي مميزات التحرير الأساسية في \SpecialChar LyX
803 \begin_layout Standard
804 كما قد تتوقع بالضبط، قائمة تحرير وشريط الأدوات القياسي يملك وظائف القص واللصق،
805 مع وظائف التحرير المعروفة الأخرى.
806 بعض منها خاص وتم شرحه في أقسام أخرى.
809 \begin_layout Standard
813 \begin_layout Itemize
815 \begin_inset Index idx
818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
847 \begin_layout Itemize
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
881 \begin_layout Itemize
883 \begin_inset Index idx
886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
911 \begin_layout Itemize
921 \begin_layout Itemize
931 \begin_layout Itemize
945 \begin_inset Index idx
948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
957 \begin_inset Index idx
960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
975 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
985 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
991 \begin_layout Standard
992 إن أول ثلاثة أشياء تعرفها، أنك تستطيع نسخ النصوص بين ليك والبرامج الأخرى
993 باستخدام قص، نسخ ولصق.
994 قص و لصق تضع النص داخل الحافظة في شكلين (مهيأ وغير مهيأ)، لهذا البرامج
995 الأخرى تستطيع اختيار الشكل المناسب لها.
996 أما وظيفة لصق فتدعم الاختيار اليدوي للنص المهيأ أو غير المهيأ عن طريق قائمة
997 تحرير، وطبعا يمكن قص ونسخ ولصق الصور.
998 إن هذه الوظائف تحاول التعامل مع محتوى الحافظة بطريقة ذكية.
999 مثلا إذا كان النص في الحافظة بهيئة CSV والمؤشر داخل الجدول، فإن النص سيلصق
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1010 لصق تظهر لك قائمة بآخر الأشياء التي لصقتها، وتستطيع إدراج أي واحد منها في
1011 المكان الذي به المؤشر عن طريق النقر على أي واحد منها في القائمة.
1014 \begin_layout Standard
1018 \begin_inset space ~
1021 خاص فتحتوي على عناصر اختيارية لهيئات ملفات خاصة، بناء على محتوى الحافظة.
1023 مثل HTML، \SpecialChar LaTeX
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1038 ، PDF، PNG، JPEG و EMF.
1041 عناصر هذه القائمة تكون عملية إذا كانت الحافظة بها نفس المحتوى ولكن بهيئات
1042 مختلفة، واردت اختيار هيئة واحدة.
1043 (مثلا بعض البرامج تقوم بنسخ الصور في الحافظة كرسم وكنص) عنصر القائمة لصق
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1047 خاص\SpecialChar menuseparator
1049 \begin_inset space ~
1053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1057 \begin_inset space ~
1060 الأسطر يشبه ما سبق، مع اختلاف واحد وهو أنه يعمل مع النصوص فقط.
1061 إنه سوف يدرج النص من الحافظة ولهذا سيدرج كل النصوص في الحافظة كفقرة واحدة.
1062 والفقرة الجديدة ستبدأ في سطر فارغ جديد.
1064 \begin_inset space ~
1067 السطور سيدرج النص كفقرات في المكان الذي الذي انتهى فيه السطر.
1068 كمثال عملي نسخ محتوى جدول من صفحة ويب إلى جدول في ليك.
1070 \begin_inset space ~
1073 خاص\SpecialChar menuseparator
1075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1079 \begin_inset space ~
1087 \begin_inset space ~
1090 خاص\SpecialChar menuseparator
1091 التحديد من التحديد الرئيسي.
1092 هذا عادة هو النص المحدد حاليا.
1095 \begin_layout Standard
1098 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1100 \begin_inset space ~
1104 \begin_inset space ~
1112 \begin_inset space ~
1116 \begin_inset space ~
1120 وبمجرد العثور على الكلمة أو الجملة المطلوبة، سيقوم
1126 النقر على زر استبدال سيستبدل الكلمة المحددة بالكلمة أو الجملة التي كتبتها
1128 وتستطيع النقر على زر بحث التالي لتخطي الكلمة الحالية.
1129 أما النقر على زر استبدال الكل سوف يستبدل كل الكلمة المراد استبدالها بشكل
1131 إن خيار حالة الأحرف يمكن استخدامه إذا كنت تريد أن يراعي البحث حالة الأحرف
1132 الانجليزية (Capital، small) .
1133 فإذا تم اختياره، لن تجد وظيفة البحث كلمة Test إذا كتبت الكلمة في حقل البحث
1135 الخيار التالي هو كلمات كاملة فقط، فمثلا عند البحث عن كلمة يذهب لن يتوقف
1136 عند كلمة يذهبون لأنها غير مطابقة لها تماما في عدد الأحرف.
1142 أيضا ميزة البحث المتقدم والذي يحتوي على خيارات أكثر، ويمكن الاطلاع على
1143 تفاصيل أكثر عنه في قسم
1146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1148 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1155 \begin_layout Standard
1158 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1159 \begin_inset space \space{}
1163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1171 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1173 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1178 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1185 \begin_layout Standard
1186 استخدام الاختصار Ctrl+A سيحدد كامل النص في المستند.
1187 بينما لو استخدمنا نفس الاختصار أثناء وجود المؤشر داخل مربع إدارج (ملاحظة
1188 مظللة مثلا) فإنه سيتم تحديد ما في داخل الملاحظة المظللة فقط.
1189 لكن النقر على Ctrl+A بشكل متتالي سيجعل التحديد يشمل مربع الإدراج، ثم سيقوم
1190 بتحديد كامل المستند.
1191 أخيرا إذا استخدمنا المفاتيح Ctrl+Alt+A فإن كامل المستند سيتم تحديده بالإضافة
1192 إلى أن المؤشر سيصبح في نهاية المستند.
1195 \begin_layout Section
1197 \begin_inset Index idx
1200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1207 \begin_inset Index idx
1210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1219 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1226 \begin_layout Standard
1227 إذا وقعت بخطأ، يمكنك العودة عنه بسهولة.
1229 يخصص سعة كبيرة في الذاكرة المؤقتة لخاصيتي تراجع/تكرار.
1232 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1241 في شريط الأدوات لتراجع عن خطأ ما.
1242 وإذا تراجعت أكثر من اللازم يمكنك استخدام
1268 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1281 إن خاصية التراجع والتكرار محدودة بمئة خطوة لعدم استهلاك الذاكرة.
1284 \begin_layout Standard
1285 لاحظ أنك إذا تراجعت عن جميع الخطوات، أي إلى آخر عملية حفظ، فإن مفتاح الترجع
1286 سيصبح غير مفعل، ولن تستطيع للأسف التراجع عن عمليات قمت بها سابقا.
1289 \begin_layout Standard
1290 عمليتي التراجع و التكرار تعمل مع أي شيء في \SpecialChar LyX
1291 ، لكنها لا تسمح بالتراجع حرف
1292 حرف، وإنما التراجع عن كامل المقطع.
1295 \begin_layout Section
1297 \begin_inset Index idx
1300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1309 \begin_layout Standard
1310 هذه أهم عمليات أساسية تقوم بها الفارة
1313 \begin_layout Enumerate
1318 \begin_layout Itemize
1319 عند النقر بزر الفارة الأيسر في أي مكان من المستند في نافذة التحرير.
1320 نقرة واحدة يصبح المؤشر داخل النص، وعند النقر على الكلمة نقرتين يم تحديد
1321 الكلمة، وعند النقر عليها ثلاث مرات يتم تحديد كامل السطر.
1325 \begin_layout Enumerate
1330 \begin_layout Itemize
1331 ضع المؤشر حيث تريد أن يبدأ التحديد ثم انقر على زر الفارة الأيسر، ثم اسحب
1332 إلى نهاية التحديد وارفع إصبعك عن زر الفارة.
1333 سيقوم \SpecialChar LyX
1334 بتحديد النص بين نقطتي البداية والنهاية اللتين قمت بتحديدهما.
1337 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1338 نسخ أو Ctrl+C لإنشاء نسخة من النص في الحافظة.
1341 \begin_layout Itemize
1342 ضع المؤشر حيث تريد لصق النص في نافذة التحرير ثم
1344 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1349 \begin_layout Enumerate
1350 الإدراج (تذييل، ملاحظة، تعويم، إلخ.)
1354 \begin_layout Standard
1355 أنقر بزر الفارة الأيمن على الكائن الذي أدرجته ثم اختر إعدادات.
1356 أيضا اطلع على appropriate القسم في هذا الكتيب للمزيد من التفاصيل.
1360 \begin_layout Section
1362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1364 name "sec:Navigating"
1369 \begin_inset Index idx
1372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1381 \begin_layout Standard
1383 يعرض عليك عدة طرق للاستكشاف داخل المستندات:
1386 \begin_layout Itemize
1387 قائمة استكشاف تحتوي قائمة بكل أقسام المستند وتستطيع الانتقال لأي منها بالنقر
1391 \begin_layout Itemize
1392 الخلاصة، تستطيع الوصول لها عن طريق
1394 عرض\SpecialChar menuseparator
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 الخلاصة أو بالنقر على رمز الخلاصة
1404 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1410 \begin_layout Itemize
1411 يمكنك تعيين العلامات الإشارات المرجعية في مستندك عن طريق
1413 استكشاف\SpecialChar menuseparator
1416 العلامات ومن نفس القائمة يمكنك العودة لها.
1417 مع ملاحظة أن هذه العلامات تحفظ بين الجلسات.
1420 \begin_layout Standard
1424 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1429 أو استكشاف\SpecialChar menuseparator
1430 العلامات\SpecialChar menuseparator
1432 \begin_inset space ~
1437 للخلف أو Ctrl+< سوف يعود بك لأخر موقع قمت بالتعديل عليه.
1438 وهذا عملي عندما يكون لديك مستند كبير وتكون في جزء معين منه لمشاهدة شيء
1439 ما، ثم ترغب بالعودة لآخر مكان قمت بتعديله.
1442 \begin_layout Standard
1443 أخير بالنقر على زر F5 يتحرك مؤشر الفارة إلى وسط نافذة التحرير.
1446 \begin_layout Subsection
1448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1450 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1455 \begin_inset Index idx
1458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1465 \begin_inset Index idx
1468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_layout Standard
1478 في أعلى نافذة الخلاصة توجد قائمة منسدلة، تستطيع من خلال اختيار عدة أنواع
1479 من القوائم، مثل جدول المحتويات، وقائمة الرسوم التوضيحية وقائمة الجداول
1482 \begin_inset space ~
1486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1488 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1492 )، أو الملاحظات ولاستشهادات (أنظر القسم
1493 \begin_inset space ~
1497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1499 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1506 \begin_layout Standard
1507 إن النقر على أي من محتويات هذه القوائم سوف ينتقل بك إليه.
1510 \begin_layout Standard
1511 عند النقر على أي عنصر بزر الفارة الأيمن سوف يعرض الخيارات والإعدادات الخاصة
1512 به، مثلا النقر على استشهاد معين بزر الفارة الأيمن سوف يظهر خيار إعدادات
1513 ليسمح لك بالتعديل على الاستشهاد.
1516 \begin_layout Standard
1517 إن حقل المرشح في أعلى النافذة يسمح لك بتقييد المدخلات التي ستظهر في الخلاصة.
1518 مثلا، إذا كنت تعرض قائمة الملصقات والمراجع وترغب برؤية مراجع الأقسام الفرعية
1519 فقط، أكتب كلمة sub في المرشح، عندها سيتم عرض العناصر التي تحتوي هذه الكلمة
1523 \begin_layout Standard
1526 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1527 you further to control the display.
1532 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1533 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1539 option keeps it in the current view state.
1540 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1541 \begin_inset space ~
1544 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1545 \begin_inset space ~
1548 3, the subsections of sections
1549 \begin_inset space ~
1552 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1557 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1558 \begin_inset space ~
1562 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1572 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 في اسفل نافذة الخلاصة توجد عدة أزرار تسمح لك بالمزيد من التحكم بالعرض، فالخيار
1577 فرز يرتب القائمة الحالية هجائيا.
1578 وبدون هذا الخيار ستظهر عناصر القائمة مرتبة حسب مكان وجودها في المستند.
1581 \begin_layout Standard
1588 يستخدم لتحديث القائمة (وهو غير مهم عادة).
1589 أما بقية الأزرار فتسمح بتغيير موقع عنصر معين في قسم داخل المستند.
1602 يسمحان بالتعديل للأعلى والأسفل مع المحافظة على المستوى، مثلا القسم
1606 يمكن نقله للأعلى ليصبح
1610 والقسم الذي قبله ستحول رقمه تلقائيا إلى
1614 ، وكذلك يمكن نقله للأسفل ليصبح
1631 فيسمحان برفع أو حفظ مستوى القسم للأعلى والاسفل ، مثلا القسم
1636 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1640 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1644 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1648 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1651 وبالتالي يتحول رقمه من
1659 ، وكذلك بالنسبة لزر الخفض، فعند النقر عليه سيخفض مستوى القسم
1664 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1668 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1672 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1676 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1679 في القسم السابق له، وبالتالي يتحول رقمه من
1690 \begin_layout Standard
1691 بالنقر بزر الفارة الأيمن على قسم في نافذة الخلاصة يمكنك نسخ كامل القسم،
1695 \begin_layout Subsection
1697 \begin_inset Index idx
1700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1701 الاستكشاف ! الشريط الأفقي
1709 \begin_layout Standard
1710 لا يملك \SpecialChar LyX
1711 شريط أفقي لأن هيئة صفحات الخرج مثل A
1715 أقل عرضا من شاشة الحاسب الشخصي أو الحاسب المحمول.
1716 وسوف لن تواجه مشكلة في استعراض ملف الخرج إذا كان عرضه أكبر من عرض الشاشة.
1719 \begin_layout Standard
1720 هناك بعض الحالات التي يكون فيها من الضروري وجود شريط التمرير الأفقي.
1724 \begin_layout Itemize
1726 يستخدم في الأجهزة اللوحية الصغيرة
1729 \begin_layout Itemize
1730 يتم تدوير الجهاز اللوحي °
1738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1746 \begin_inset space ~
1759 \begin_layout Itemize
1760 إنشاء عمليات رياضية بأسماء أوامر طويلة
1763 \begin_layout Standard
1764 ولهذه الحالات \SpecialChar LyX
1765 يملك آلية للتنقل داخل المستند.
1766 مثلا عند تقلص شاشة \SpecialChar LyX
1767 أثناء تحرير جدول عريض
1768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1770 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
1775 يمكننا التنقل بين خلاليا الجدول باستخدام مفتاح الجدولة Tab في لوحة لمفاتح
1776 أو عن طريق أزرار الأسهم.
1779 \begin_layout Standard
1780 \begin_inset Float table
1786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1787 \begin_inset Caption Standard
1789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1792 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
1796 اختبار شريط التمرير الأفقي.
1804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1806 \begin_inset Tabular
1807 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
1808 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
1809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
1810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
1811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
1813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
1816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
1825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
1834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1853 \begin_layout Section
1854 الإكمال التلقائي للكلمة
1855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1857 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1862 \begin_inset Index idx
1865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1872 \begin_inset Index idx
1875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1906 \begin_layout Standard
1910 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1912 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1913 is used to propose completions.
1916 \begin_layout Standard
1919 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
1922 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
1927 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1943 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
1947 \begin_inset space ~
1952 the completions are always shown in a popup.
1953 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
1957 \begin_inset space ~
1963 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
1964 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
1965 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
1966 if long completions should be abbreviated.
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1973 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
1974 completions available.
1979 key to accept a proposed completion.
1980 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
1981 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
1982 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1992 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
1993 ing options for text.
1994 The special math option
1998 enables characters to be composed.
1999 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2000 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2003 , you can then input the characters
2004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2015 to a formula to get it.
2016 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2017 of the math toolbar.
2018 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2022 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2023 's installation folder.
2024 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2033 \begin_layout Section
2034 مفاتيح التحكم الأساسية
2035 \begin_inset Index idx
2038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2045 \begin_inset Index idx
2048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2077 \begin_inset Index idx
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2113 \begin_layout Standard
2116 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2130 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2133 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2137 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2138 \begin_inset space ~
2142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2144 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2151 \begin_layout Standard
2157 \begin_inset space ~
2165 \begin_inset space ~
2186 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2190 \begin_layout Labeling
2191 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2195 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2196 LatexCommand nomenclature
2198 description "مفتاح جدولة"
2206 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2208 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2209 \begin_inset space ~
2213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2215 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2222 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2226 , especially section
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2233 reference "subsec:Lists"
2239 If you are still confused, look in the
2244 \begin_inset Newline newline
2252 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2253 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2257 \begin_layout Labeling
2258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2262 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2263 LatexCommand nomenclature
2265 description "مفتاح الخروج"
2274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2282 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2285 \begin_layout Labeling
2286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2293 \begin_inset space ~
2297 \begin_inset space ~
2304 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2305 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2309 \begin_layout Standard
2310 توجد ثلاث مفاتح للتعديل:
2313 \begin_layout Labeling
2314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "مفتاح التحكم"
2341 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2342 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2346 \begin_layout Itemize
2356 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2359 \begin_layout Itemize
2369 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2372 \begin_layout Itemize
2382 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2386 \begin_layout Labeling
2387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2406 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2407 LatexCommand nomenclature
2409 description "مفتاح علوي"
2414 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2415 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2418 \begin_layout Labeling
2419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2438 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2439 LatexCommand nomenclature
2441 description "مفتاح Alt"
2446 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2447 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2448 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2454 \begin_inset Newline newline
2457 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2459 menu accelerator keys
2462 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2463 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2467 \begin_layout Standard
2470 For example, the sequence
2471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2477 \begin_inset space ~
2481 \begin_inset space ~
2487 \begin_inset space ~
2495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2514 \begin_inset space ~
2520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2530 \begin_layout Standard
2537 manual lists all other things bound to the
2545 \begin_layout Standard
2548 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2550 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2551 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2552 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2553 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2554 The \SpecialChar LyX
2555 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2556 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2557 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2559 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2575 followed by a capital
2582 \begin_layout Chapter
2583 أساسيات ليك \SpecialChar LyX
2585 \begin_inset Index idx
2588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2597 \begin_layout Section
2599 \begin_inset Index idx
2602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2611 \begin_layout Subsection
2615 \begin_layout Standard
2618 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2619 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2620 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2621 numbering schemes, and so on.
2622 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2623 and format the title of your document differently.
2626 \begin_layout Standard
2633 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2634 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2635 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2636 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2637 picks one for you by default.
2638 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2641 \begin_layout Subsection
2643 \begin_inset Index idx
2646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2655 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2662 \begin_layout Standard
2663 تستطيع اختيار نوع المستند عن طريق
2665 مستند\SpecialChar menuseparator
2666 إعدادات\SpecialChar menuseparator
2670 \begin_inset Index idx
2673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2682 اختر نوع المستند الذي تريد، ثم اضبطه بالخيارات التي تريد.
2685 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2689 \begin_layout Standard
2690 يحتوي ليك على أربعة أنواع من المستندات الأساسية.
2694 \begin_layout Description
2695 مقالة للمقالات البسيطة
2698 \begin_layout Description
2699 تقرير للتقارير البسيطة
2702 \begin_layout Description
2706 \begin_layout Description
2707 رسالة للرسائل بالأسلوب الأمريكي
2710 \begin_layout Standard
2711 هناك أنواع غير قياسية أخرى، والتي يستخدمها \SpecialChar LyX
2712 إذا كانت إذا كانت ملفات \SpecialChar LaTeX
2714 بها مركبة، على الرقم من أن معظم هذه الملفات يتم تركيبها بشكل افتراضي.
2715 وسنستعرض في الأسطر القادمة بعضا منها.
2716 أما إذا أردت مشاهدة قائمة كاملة بكل أنواع المستندات فستجدها في فصل أنواع
2717 المستندات الخاصة في كتيب خصائص إضافية:
2720 \begin_layout Description
2721 A&A مقالة حسب نسق وهيئة صحفية علم الفلك والفيزياء الفلكية.
2724 \begin_layout Description
2725 ACS مقالة حسب نسق وهيئة صحفية مجتمع الكيميائيين الأمريكيين.
2728 \begin_layout Description
2729 AGU مقالة حسب نسق وهيئة صحفية اتحاد الجيوفيزيائيين الأمريكيين.
2732 \begin_layout Description
2735 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2736 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2737 There are three article layouts available.
2738 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2739 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2740 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2741 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2746 sequential numbering
2747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2750 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2751 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2752 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2753 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2756 \begin_layout Description
2757 Beamer نسق للعروض التقديمية، وهو الأفضل من بقية حزم العروض التقديمية.
2760 \begin_layout Description
2761 Broadway نسق كتابة الألعاب.
2762 إنه ليس نوع موجود في \SpecialChar LaTeX
2763 ، لكنه نوع جديد تم إنشاءه في \SpecialChar LyX
2767 \begin_layout Description
2768 Chess نسق للكتابة عن لعبة الشطرنج.
2771 \begin_layout Description
2773 \begin_inset space ~
2776 vitae نوع لإنشاء بيان السيرة
2779 \begin_layout Description
2780 Elsarticle نسق صحيفة مجموعة النشر Elsevier
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 Foils يستخدم لإنتاج الشفافيات
2787 \begin_layout Description
2788 Hollywood يستخدم في كتابة سكربتات الأفلام الأمريكية.
2789 إنه ليس نوع موجود في \SpecialChar LaTeX
2790 ، لكنه نوع جديد تم إنشاءه في \SpecialChar LyX
2794 \begin_layout Description
2795 IEEEtran نسق صحيفة معهد الإلكترونيات ومهندسي الإلكترونيات (IEEE)
2798 \begin_layout Description
2799 IOP نسق صحيفة مجموعة نشر معهد الفيزياء
2802 \begin_layout Description
2803 Kluwer نسق صحيفة مجموعة النشر Kluwer
2806 \begin_layout Description
2807 KOMA-Script بديل لنوع المستند القياسي، ويملك الكثير من المميزات العملية
2808 مما جعله الأكثر استخداما لإنتاج الكتب الكبيرة والرسائل العلمية.
2809 (مستخدم في هذا المستند.)
2812 \begin_layout Description
2813 Memoir بديل آخر للنوع القياسي
2816 \begin_layout Description
2817 Powerdot نسق للعروض التقديمية لكنه أقل دعما للصور من Beamer .
2820 \begin_layout Description
2821 REVTeX يستخدم في نشر مقالات مجتمع الفيزياء الأمريكي (APS), والمعهد الأمريكي
2822 للفيزياء (AIP), ومجتمع البصريات الأمريكي (OSA).
2823 وهذا النوع غير متوافق تماما مع \SpecialChar LyX
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Slides نوع قديم يستخدم لإنتاج الشفافيات
2831 \begin_layout Description
2833 \begin_inset space ~
2836 Proceedings نسق صحيفة المجتمع الدولي لمهندسي البصريات (SPIE)
2839 \begin_layout Description
2840 Springer نسق صحيفة مجموعة النشر Springer
2843 \begin_layout Standard
2844 لم نقم بالدخول في تفاصيل كيفية استخدام أنواع المستندات السابقة.
2847 ويمكنك العثور على تفاصيل عن الأنواع غير القياسية في فصل أنواع المستندات
2848 غير القياسية في كتيب
2851 إلى هنا، سوف نكتفي ببعض الخصائص الأكثر شيوعا لهذه الأنواع.
2854 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2858 \begin_layout Standard
2861 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2863 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2864 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2868 \begin_inset Index idx
2871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2890 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2891 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2893 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2896 \begin_layout Standard
2901 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2906 , are highly specialized.
2908 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2909 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2910 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2911 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2912 by some document class.
2913 There are just too many of them.
2914 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2917 \begin_layout Standard
2920 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2928 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2929 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2930 document class for a new file.
2932 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2935 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
2942 manual for information on how to install them.
2945 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2954 Although \SpecialChar LyX
2955 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
2956 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
2957 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
2958 class files to be used for dissertation
2959 s submitted to those universities.
2960 The \SpecialChar LyX
2961 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2963 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2967 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
2973 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2976 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2980 name "subsec:Modules"
2985 \begin_inset Index idx
2988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2997 \begin_layout Standard
3000 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3001 chosen document class.
3002 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3003 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3010 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3015 \begin_inset Index idx
3018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3027 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3031 \begin_layout Standard
3034 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3035 packages or file format converters that are not always
3036 installed by default.
3038 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3039 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3040 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3041 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3043 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3044 file without the missing prerequisites.
3045 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3046 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3049 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3054 \begin_inset Index idx
3057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3065 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3070 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3073 \begin_layout Standard
3076 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3085 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3087 will advise you about these things.
3095 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3099 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3104 \begin_inset Index idx
3107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 \begin_layout Standard
3119 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3120 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3121 : They are intended to be used in
3122 a variety of different documents.
3123 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3124 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3125 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3126 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3127 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3129 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3147 manual for information on how to use it.
3150 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3155 كل نوع من المستندات لها خصائص افتراضية.
3156 وهنا جدول بسيط يقارن بينها:
3159 \begin_layout Standard
3160 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3166 \begin_layout Standard
3168 \begin_inset Tabular
3169 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3170 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3171 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3173 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3174 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3181 \begin_inset space ~
3189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3457 \begin_layout Standard
3458 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3464 \begin_layout Standard
3467 You're probably also wondering what
3468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3472 \begin_inset space ~
3476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3480 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3481 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3486 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3491 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3501 headings, there are also
3509 headings, and so on.
3510 We will describe these headings fully in section
3513 \begin_inset space ~
3517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3519 reference "subsec:Headings"
3526 \begin_layout Subsection
3528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3530 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3535 \begin_inset Index idx
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3545 \begin_inset Index idx
3548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3557 \begin_layout Standard
3560 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3562 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3569 \begin_inset space ~
3577 \begin_inset space ~
3582 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3584 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3585 doesn't support special options you want to
3586 use for your document.
3587 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3588 -class and its options, you have to read
3592 \begin_layout Standard
3598 \begin_inset space ~
3605 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3611 \begin_inset space ~
3616 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3617 You can choose between the following five options:
3620 \begin_layout Labeling
3621 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3626 يستخدم أسلوب الصفحة الافتراضي لهذا المستند.
3629 \begin_layout Labeling
3630 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3635 بدون ترقيم للصفحات أو عناوين.
3638 \begin_layout Labeling
3639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3647 \begin_layout Labeling
3648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3653 ترقيم للصفحات وفصول وأقسام مرقمة.
3654 وهذا يتوقف على الحد الأعلى من المستويات الذي يسمح به نوع المستوى المستخدم.
3657 \begin_layout Labeling
3658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3663 هذا يسمح لك بتخصيص كامل للراس والتذييل إذا كنت ركبت حزمة
3668 \begin_inset Index idx
3671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3672 حزمة لتيك ! fancyhdr
3678 والتي شرحت بشكل مفصل في القسم
3679 \begin_inset space ~
3683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3685 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3692 \begin_layout Standard
3695 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3698 \begin_inset space ~
3702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3704 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3711 \begin_layout Subsection
3713 \begin_inset Index idx
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3725 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3732 \begin_layout Standard
3733 يمكن أن تجد الخيارات التالية في
3736 \begin_inset space ~
3743 مستند\SpecialChar menuseparator
3747 \begin_inset Index idx
3750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3759 \begin_layout Labeling
3760 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3769 ما هو حجم ورق الطباعة المتاح.
3774 \begin_layout Itemize
3780 \begin_layout Itemize
3786 \begin_layout Itemize
3792 \begin_layout Itemize
3798 \begin_layout Itemize
3801 رسائل أمريكية, قانوني أمريكي, إداري أمريكي
3804 \begin_layout Itemize
3807 ياباني B0 – ياباني B6
3810 \begin_layout Itemize
3817 \begin_layout Labeling
3818 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3824 To choose whether to output as
3835 \begin_layout Labeling
3836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3841 \begin_inset space ~
3846 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3847 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3850 \begin_layout Subsection
3852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3854 name "subsec:Margins"
3859 \begin_inset Index idx
3862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3869 \begin_inset Index idx
3872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3881 \begin_layout Standard
3884 Paper margins are set in the menu
3886 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3891 \begin_inset Index idx
3894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3903 \begin_layout Standard
3906 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
3907 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
3908 the paper format and the font size into account.
3911 \begin_layout Subsection
3915 \begin_layout Standard
3918 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3924 That includes the paragraph environments.
3925 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
3926 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
3927 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3929 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
3930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3938 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
3940 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
3941 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
3942 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
3945 \begin_layout Section
3946 بادئة الفقرة والفاصلة
3947 \begin_inset Index idx
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3959 \begin_layout Subsection
3961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3963 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3970 \begin_layout Standard
3973 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
3974 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
3977 \begin_layout Standard
3980 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
3981 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
3982 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
3983 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
3987 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
3993 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
3994 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
3995 language than English.
3997 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4000 \begin_layout Standard
4003 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4004 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4005 into \SpecialChar LyX
4007 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4010 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4012 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4013 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4014 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4023 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4024 goes to produce a printable file.
4029 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4031 gives you the ability globally to change
4035 these pre-coded spacings.
4036 We will explain more later.
4039 \begin_layout Subsection
4041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4043 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4048 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4060 \begin_layout Standard
4070 \begin_inset space ~
4078 \begin_inset space ~
4085 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4101 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4104 \begin_layout Subsection
4108 \begin_layout Standard
4111 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4116 \begin_inset space ~
4121 dialog and toggle the
4124 \begin_inset space ~
4129 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4134 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4140 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4141 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4145 \begin_layout Standard
4148 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4149 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4152 \begin_layout Subsection
4154 \begin_inset Index idx
4157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4166 \begin_layout Standard
4171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4175 \begin_inset Index idx
4178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4187 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4191 \begin_inset space ~
4200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4203 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4210 \begin_inset Index idx
4213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4214 حزمة لتيك ! setspace
4221 installed to use this feature.
4226 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4228 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4230 \begin_inset space ~
4235 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4236 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4239 \begin_layout Section
4241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4243 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4248 \begin_inset Index idx
4251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4270 \begin_layout Subsection
4274 \begin_layout Standard
4277 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4290 } \SpecialChar ldots
4300 \begin_inset Newline newline
4303 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4305 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4306 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4307 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4316 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4319 \begin_layout Standard
4322 A paragraph environment is simply a
4323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4331 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4332 scheme, labels, and so on.
4333 Additionally, you can
4334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4341 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4342 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4343 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4344 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4346 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4348 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4351 \begin_layout Standard
4354 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4357 \begin_inset Graphics
4358 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4366 at the left end of the toolbar.
4368 will change the environment of the
4372 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4373 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4374 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4378 \begin_layout Standard
4389 create a new paragraph using the
4393 paragraph environment.
4395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4402 because if you are in one of these environments:
4405 \begin_layout Itemize
4411 \begin_layout Itemize
4417 \begin_layout Itemize
4423 \begin_layout Itemize
4429 \begin_layout Itemize
4435 \begin_layout Itemize
4441 \begin_layout Itemize
4447 \begin_layout Standard
4451 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4455 , rather than resetting it to
4460 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4461 \begin_inset space ~
4465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4467 reference "sec:Nesting"
4474 \begin_layout Subsection
4478 \begin_layout Standard
4481 The default paragraph environment is
4486 It creates a plain paragraph.
4488 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4489 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4490 this manual) are in the
4497 \begin_layout Standard
4500 You can nest a paragraph using the
4504 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4512 \begin_layout Subsection
4514 \begin_inset Index idx
4517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4526 \begin_layout Standard
4529 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4530 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4539 for thanks or contact information.
4540 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4541 places all of this on a separate page
4542 along with today's date.
4543 For other types of documents, the title
4544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4551 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4555 \begin_layout Standard
4559 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4573 Here's how you use them:
4576 \begin_layout Itemize
4579 Put the title of your document in the
4586 \begin_layout Itemize
4589 Put the author name in the
4596 \begin_layout Itemize
4599 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4600 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4606 Note that using this environment is optional.
4607 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4608 will automatically insert today's date.
4609 If you don't want a date, use the option
4611 Suppress default date on front page
4615 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4616 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4618 \begin_inset space ~
4626 \begin_layout Standard
4629 You can use footnotes to insert
4630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4637 or contact information.
4640 \begin_layout Subsection
4642 \begin_inset Index idx
4645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4654 name "subsec:Headings"
4661 \begin_layout Standard
4664 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4666 takes care of the numbering for you.
4669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4671 \begin_inset Index idx
4674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4675 عنونة الأقسام ! ترقيم
4683 \begin_layout Standard
4738 أنواع من العناوين الجانبية المرقمة.
4742 \begin_layout Enumerate
4748 \begin_layout Enumerate
4754 \begin_layout Enumerate
4760 \begin_layout Enumerate
4766 \begin_layout Enumerate
4772 \begin_layout Enumerate
4778 \begin_layout Enumerate
4784 \begin_layout Standard
4788 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4789 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4790 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4793 \begin_layout Standard
4796 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4797 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4798 You group the book into chapters.
4800 does a similar grouping:
4803 \begin_layout Itemize
4804 الجزء ينقسم إلى فصول أو أقسام
4807 \begin_layout Itemize
4808 الفصل ينقسم إلى أقسام
4811 \begin_layout Itemize
4812 القسم ينقسم إلى أقسام فرعية
4815 \begin_layout Itemize
4816 القسم الفرعي ينقسم إلى أقسام تحت فرعية
4819 \begin_layout Itemize
4820 القسم تحت الفرعي ينقسم إلى فقرات
4823 \begin_layout Itemize
4824 الفقرة تنقسم إلى فقرات فرعية
4827 \begin_layout Standard
4830 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4839 Not all document types use the
4843 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4848 is the top-level heading.
4856 \begin_layout Standard
4863 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
4864 labels it with its number,
4865 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4867 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4880 العناوين غير المرقمة
4881 \begin_inset Index idx
4884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4885 عنونة الأقسام ! غير مرقم
4893 \begin_layout Standard
4896 The unnumbered section headings have a
4897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4904 at the end of their name.
4905 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4906 the table of contents, see section
4907 \begin_inset space ~
4911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4924 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
4931 \begin_layout Standard
4934 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4935 in the Table of Contents.
4936 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4938 Just as certain classes start with
4952 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
4962 This is something you can change.
4965 \begin_layout Standard
4970 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4990 \begin_inset space ~
4994 \begin_inset space ~
4999 you will see two counters.
5004 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5005 numbers a section heading.
5006 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5010 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5012 \begin_inset Index idx
5015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5016 عنونة الأقسام ! عنوان قصير
5022 \begin_inset Argument 1
5025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5036 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5043 \begin_layout Standard
5046 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5047 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5048 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5049 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5052 \begin_layout Standard
5056 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5057 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5058 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5059 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5064 \begin_inset space ~
5070 This will insert a box labeled
5071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5075 \begin_inset space ~
5079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5082 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5083 This also works for captions inside floats.
5084 There can only be one short title per title.
5087 \begin_layout Standard
5090 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5093 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5097 \begin_layout Standard
5100 The following information applies to all section headings:
5103 \begin_layout Itemize
5104 لا تستطيع التفريخ داخلها.
5107 \begin_layout Itemize
5108 لا تستطيع إضافة ملاحظة هامشية داخلها.
5111 \begin_layout Itemize
5112 لا تستطيع إدراج معادلة رياضية فيها.
5115 \begin_layout Itemize
5116 لا تستطيع إدراج ملصق أو إشارة مرجعية لرقمها.
5119 \begin_layout Subsection
5123 \begin_layout Standard
5127 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5141 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5142 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5143 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5144 the text they contain.
5145 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5153 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5159 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5168 when you start a new paragraph.
5169 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5173 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5174 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5175 have to change back to the
5179 environment yourself.
5182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5183 الاقتباس والاقتباس الطويل
5184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5191 \begin_inset Index idx
5194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5203 \begin_layout Standard
5206 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5207 time for the differences.
5216 are identical except for one difference:
5220 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5229 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5232 \begin_layout Standard
5235 Here's an example of the
5250 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5252 See – no indentation!
5258 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5259 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5260 the other paragraph.
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5266 Here's another example, this time in the
5273 \begin_layout Quotation
5281 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5282 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5283 the first line, then
5287 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5291 you were quoting other text.
5294 \begin_layout Quotation
5297 Here's a new paragraph.
5298 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5299 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5302 \begin_layout Standard
5305 As the examples show,
5309 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5310 They should put quotes in the
5315 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5319 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5324 \begin_inset Index idx
5327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5334 \begin_inset Index idx
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5359 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5367 \begin_inset Newline newline
5370 Which I did not rehearse!
5376 It could be much worse.
5377 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5379 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5380 indented a bit more than the first.
5381 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5389 \begin_inset Newline newline
5392 And make things look fine
5393 \begin_inset Newline newline
5401 arg "newline-insert newline"
5407 \begin_layout Standard
5414 does not indent both margins.
5415 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5416 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5421 arg "newline-insert newline"
5427 \begin_layout Subsection
5429 \begin_inset Index idx
5432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5448 \begin_layout Standard
5452 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5462 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5463 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5472 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5473 lets you provide your own label.
5474 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5475 describing some general features of all four of them.
5478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5482 \begin_layout Standard
5485 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5487 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5488 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5497 reset the environment to
5501 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5502 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5503 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5509 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5515 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5522 \begin_layout Standard
5525 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5526 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5527 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5529 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5530 you read all of section
5533 \begin_inset space ~
5537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5539 reference "sec:Nesting"
5546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5548 \begin_inset Index idx
5551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5567 \begin_layout Standard
5570 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5574 paragraph environment.
5575 It has the following properties:
5578 \begin_layout Itemize
5581 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5585 \begin_layout Itemize
5589 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5592 \begin_layout Itemize
5595 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5602 The items can have any length.
5604 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5605 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5612 \begin_layout Itemize
5619 environment inside another
5623 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5627 \begin_layout Itemize
5630 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5633 \begin_layout Itemize
5637 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5640 \begin_layout Itemize
5644 \begin_inset space ~
5648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5650 reference "sec:Nesting"
5654 for a full explanation of nesting.
5658 \begin_layout Standard
5661 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5670 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5673 \begin_layout Standard
5676 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5677 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5680 \begin_layout Itemize
5683 The label for the first level
5687 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5691 \begin_layout Itemize
5694 The label for the second level is a dash.
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5701 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5705 \begin_layout Itemize
5708 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5712 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 Back out to the third level.
5719 \begin_layout Itemize
5722 Back to the second level.
5726 \begin_layout Itemize
5729 Back to the outermost level.
5732 \begin_layout Standard
5735 These are the default labels for an
5740 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5742 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5745 dialog in the submenu
5751 \begin_inset Index idx
5754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5762 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5766 \begin_layout Standard
5769 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5770 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5772 \begin_inset space ~
5776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5778 reference "sec:Nesting"
5785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5787 \begin_inset Index idx
5790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5799 name "sec:Enumerate"
5806 \begin_layout Standard
5813 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5814 It has these properties:
5817 \begin_layout Enumerate
5820 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5824 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5831 \begin_layout Enumerate
5835 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5838 \begin_layout Enumerate
5845 environment resets the counter to one.
5848 \begin_layout Enumerate
5863 \begin_layout Enumerate
5866 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5867 Items can have any length.
5870 \begin_layout Enumerate
5873 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5876 \begin_layout Enumerate
5879 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5882 \begin_layout Enumerate
5885 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5889 \begin_layout Standard
5900 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5902 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5903 labels the four different levels in an
5910 \begin_layout Enumerate
5913 The first level of an
5917 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5921 \begin_layout Enumerate
5924 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5928 \begin_layout Enumerate
5931 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5935 \begin_layout Enumerate
5938 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5941 \begin_layout Enumerate
5944 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5949 \begin_layout Enumerate
5952 Back to the third level
5956 \begin_layout Enumerate
5959 Back to the second level.
5963 \begin_layout Enumerate
5966 Back to the outermost level.
5969 \begin_layout Standard
5972 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5976 environment, see section
5977 \begin_inset space ~
5981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5983 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
5988 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
5992 \begin_layout Standard
5995 There is more to nesting
5999 environments than we've stated here.
6000 You should read section
6001 \begin_inset space ~
6005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6007 reference "sec:Nesting"
6011 to learn more about nesting.
6014 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6016 \begin_inset Index idx
6019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6028 \begin_layout Standard
6031 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6035 list has no fixed label.
6036 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6045 of the first line as the label.
6049 \begin_layout Description
6050 مثال: هذا مثال على بيئة الوصف.
6053 \begin_layout Standard
6057 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6061 \begin_layout Standard
6065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6072 it is meant that the first usage of the
6076 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6078 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6088 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6096 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6098 \begin_inset space ~
6104 \begin_inset space ~
6108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6110 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6114 for more information.) Here is an example:
6117 \begin_layout Description
6121 \begin_inset space ~
6124 Example: This one shows how to use a
6127 \begin_inset space ~
6139 \begin_layout Description
6142 Usage: You should use the
6146 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6147 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6149 It's not a good idea to use a
6153 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6154 You're better off using
6166 paragraphs into them.
6169 \begin_layout Description
6172 Nesting: You can nest
6176 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6180 \begin_layout Standard
6183 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6184 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6185 them from the first line.
6188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6190 \begin_inset Index idx
6193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6209 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6210 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6214 \begin_layout Standard
6225 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6227 Here are its properties:
6230 \begin_layout Labeling
6231 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6235 \begin_inset space ~
6238 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6247 of each line as the item label.
6252 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6253 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6254 space as described above.
6257 \begin_layout Labeling
6258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6261 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6262 uses different margins for the item label and the
6263 body of the item text.
6264 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6265 label width plus a little extra space.
6269 \begin_layout Labeling
6270 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6274 \begin_inset space ~
6277 width \SpecialChar LyX
6278 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6279 If the label width is larger, the label
6280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6287 into the first line.
6288 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6289 margin of the rest of the item text.
6292 \begin_layout Labeling
6293 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6297 \begin_inset space ~
6300 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6305 environment has the same left margin.
6306 \begin_inset Newline newline
6309 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6312 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6314 \begin_inset space ~
6319 dialog (toolbar button
6324 arg "layout-paragraph"
6333 \begin_inset space ~
6338 determines the default label width.
6339 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6348 multiple times instead.
6349 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6359 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6362 \begin_inset space ~
6367 every time you alter a label in a
6372 \begin_inset Newline newline
6375 The predefined default width is the length of
6376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6384 \begin_inset space ~
6390 \begin_layout Standard
6397 list the same way as the
6401 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6407 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6411 \begin_layout Standard
6418 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6419 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6427 reference "sec:Nesting"
6431 to learn about nesting.
6434 \begin_layout Standard
6437 There is yet another feature of the
6441 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6442 left-justifies the item labels by
6444 You can use additional
6448 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6449 justifies the item label.
6454 are documented in section
6455 \begin_inset space ~
6459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6461 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6466 Here are some examples:
6469 \begin_layout Labeling
6470 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6473 Left The default for
6480 \begin_layout Labeling
6481 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6484 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6491 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6494 \begin_layout Labeling
6495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6498 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6502 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6509 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6512 \begin_layout Subsection
6514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6516 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6521 \begin_inset Index idx
6524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6536 The features described in this section require that the module
6538 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6540 is loaded in the document settings.
6541 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6549 \begin_inset Index idx
6552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6553 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
6561 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6562 الترقيم العددي المخصص
6563 \begin_inset Index idx
6566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6575 \begin_layout Standard
6579 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6582 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6585 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6586 There you add the command
6589 \begin_layout Standard
6598 \begin_layout Standard
6616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6619 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6620 Code, look at section
6621 \begin_inset space ~
6625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6627 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6640 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6647 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6648 For capital Roman numerals replace
6660 in the command above.
6661 For Arabic numerals use
6669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6676 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6691 \begin_layout Standard
6695 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6704 You can only number 26
6705 \begin_inset space ~
6708 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6716 \begin_layout Standard
6719 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6720 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6723 \begin_layout Standard
6724 هنا قائمة بالترقيم المخصص:
6727 \begin_layout Enumerate
6728 \begin_inset Argument 1
6731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6757 \begin_layout Enumerate
6758 \begin_inset Argument 1
6761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6784 \begin_layout Enumerate
6789 \begin_layout Enumerate
6790 \begin_inset Argument 1
6793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 \begin_layout Enumerate
6818 \begin_inset Argument 1
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6850 For this list these commands were used:
6853 \begin_layout Standard
6865 \begin_inset Newline newline
6873 \begin_inset Newline newline
6881 \begin_inset Newline newline
6891 \begin_layout Standard
6900 makes the label emphasized and
6909 \begin_layout Standard
6912 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6921 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6922 lists until you change the definition.
6930 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6932 \begin_inset Index idx
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 ترقيم ! عددي ! استئناف
6944 \begin_layout Standard
6947 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6950 \begin_layout Enumerate
6951 \begin_inset Argument 1
6954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6973 \begin_inset Note Note
6976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6979 goes back to default numbering
6987 \begin_layout Enumerate
6991 \begin_layout Standard
6995 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7002 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7007 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7008 to indicate that it is a resumed
7009 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7010 , but in the output.
7013 \begin_layout Standard
7016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7025 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7034 \begin_layout Standard
7037 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7039 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7040 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7041 of a normal enumeration.
7042 There, insert the command
7045 \begin_layout Standard
7052 \begin_layout Standard
7059 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7063 \begin_layout Enumerate
7067 \begin_layout Enumerate
7071 \begin_layout Standard
7072 الترقيم العددي يبدأ بالقيمة المعطاة:
7075 \begin_layout Enumerate
7076 \begin_inset Argument 1
7079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7095 الترقيم العددي يبدأ من 4
7098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7100 \begin_inset Index idx
7103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7115 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7117 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7120 \begin_layout Itemize
7124 \begin_layout Itemize
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7131 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7133 Add there the command
7137 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7140 \begin_layout Itemize
7141 \begin_inset Argument 1
7144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 \begin_layout Itemize
7167 \begin_layout Itemize
7171 \begin_layout Standard
7174 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7182 \begin_inset Index idx
7185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7186 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
7194 For more information see its documentation
7197 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7210 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7212 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7213 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7217 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7220 \begin_layout Enumerate
7221 \begin_inset Argument 1
7224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7245 \begin_layout Enumerate
7246 مع عكس المسافة البادئة
7249 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7251 \begin_inset Index idx
7254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7263 \begin_layout Standard
7266 You can also change the style of description lists.
7270 \begin_layout Standard
7277 \begin_layout Standard
7280 changes the description label font, the command
7283 \begin_layout Standard
7290 \begin_layout Standard
7293 sets the list style.
7296 \begin_layout Standard
7299 An example where the command
7302 \begin_layout Standard
7308 itshape, style=nextline
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7317 \begin_layout Description
7321 \begin_inset space ~
7325 \begin_inset Argument 1
7328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7336 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7338 itshape, style=nextline
7348 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7349 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7353 \begin_layout Description
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7360 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7361 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7362 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7368 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7376 \begin_inset Index idx
7379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7380 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
7388 For more information see its documentation
7391 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7401 \begin_layout Subsection
7403 \begin_inset Index idx
7406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7416 العنوان والعنوان الأيمن: نظرة عامة
7419 \begin_layout Standard
7422 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7423 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7431 \begin_inset space ~
7437 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7438 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7439 gags on the document.
7440 In contrast, you can use the
7447 \begin_inset space ~
7452 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7453 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7457 \begin_layout Standard
7460 Of course, you're not limited to using
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7476 \begin_inset space ~
7481 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7482 some European academic papers.
7485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7489 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7496 \begin_layout Standard
7503 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7504 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7508 \begin_inset space ~
7513 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7514 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7515 Here's an example of each:
7518 \begin_layout Right Address
7520 \begin_inset Newline newline
7524 \begin_inset Newline newline
7528 \begin_inset Newline newline
7534 \begin_layout Standard
7540 \begin_inset space ~
7546 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7548 the largest block of text on a single line.
7549 Here's an example of the
7556 \begin_layout Address
7558 \begin_inset Newline newline
7562 \begin_inset Newline newline
7568 \begin_layout Standard
7571 As you can see, both
7578 \begin_inset space ~
7583 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7588 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7589 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7595 This makes sense, since
7603 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7604 Thus, you have to use
7613 arg "newline-insert newline"
7620 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7621 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7627 \begin_inset space ~
7632 ) to start a new line in an
7639 \begin_inset space ~
7647 \begin_layout Subsection
7651 \begin_layout Standard
7654 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7655 or list of references.
7657 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7660 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7662 \begin_inset Index idx
7665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7676 \begin_layout Standard
7683 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7684 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7685 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7686 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7700 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7701 The book document classes ignores the
7705 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7709 in a letter document class.
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7719 environment does several things for you.
7720 First, it puts the centered label
7721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7729 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7731 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7732 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7733 the subsequent text.
7734 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7736 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7740 \begin_layout Standard
7743 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7747 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7748 The new paragraph will still be in the
7753 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7754 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7757 \begin_layout Standard
7758 \begin_inset Float figure
7763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7765 \begin_inset Graphics
7766 filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf
7773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7774 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7779 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7796 \begin_layout Standard
7799 We would love to demonstrate the
7803 environment, but since this document is in the
7804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7811 class, we can't do this.
7812 We inserted it therefore as figure
7813 \begin_inset space ~
7817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7819 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7824 If you have never heard of an
7825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7832 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7835 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7837 \begin_inset Index idx
7840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7849 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7856 \begin_layout Standard
7863 environment is used to list references.
7864 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7865 only use it at the end of the document.
7877 \begin_layout Standard
7880 When you first open a
7884 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7885 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7901 depending on the document class.
7902 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7903 Each paragraph of the
7907 environment is a bibliography entry.
7912 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7913 Each new paragraph is still in the
7920 \begin_layout Standard
7923 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7924 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7926 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7928 handling, have a look at section
7931 \begin_inset space ~
7935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7937 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7944 \begin_layout Subsection
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7952 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7953 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7956 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7957 كود - ليك \SpecialChar LyX
7959 \begin_inset Index idx
7962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7971 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7978 \begin_layout Standard
7986 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7988 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7993 key as a fixed whitespace.
7997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8012 \begin_inset space ~
8017 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8035 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8038 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8043 arg "newline-insert newline"
8062 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8063 So, when you finish using the
8068 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8069 Also, you can nest the
8074 environment inside of others.
8077 \begin_layout Standard
8080 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8083 \begin_layout Itemize
8091 arg "newline-insert newline"
8096 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8101 \begin_inset space \space{}
8113 arg "newline-insert newline"
8121 \begin_layout Itemize
8129 arg "newline-insert newline"
8143 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8151 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8155 You must put at least one
8159 in any line you want blank.
8160 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8164 \begin_layout Itemize
8167 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8171 since that will insert
8176 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8181 arg "self-insert \""
8187 \begin_layout Standard
8191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8209 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8215 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8218 printf("Hello World!
8223 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8229 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8235 \begin_layout Standard
8238 This is just the standard
8239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8250 \begin_layout Standard
8257 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8259 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8260 as if you used a typewriter
8263 \begin_inset Index idx
8266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8277 Program Code Listings
8282 \begin_inset space ~
8290 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8292 \begin_inset Index idx
8295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8304 \begin_layout Standard
8311 environment is similar to the
8316 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8317 computer console text.
8322 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8336 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8337 you can have empty lines.
8350 \begin_layout Itemize
8353 have a certain language and a text style
8356 \begin_layout Itemize
8359 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8360 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8361 and \SpecialChar TeX
8365 \begin_layout Standard
8368 Because of these properties
8372 works like a typewriter.
8376 \begin_layout Verbatim
8380 \begin_layout Verbatim
8383 The following 2 lines are empty:
8386 \begin_layout Verbatim
8390 \begin_layout Verbatim
8394 \begin_layout Verbatim
8395 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8400 \begin_layout Standard
8407 environment is identical to
8411 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8412 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8419 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8423 \begin_layout Section
8425 \begin_inset Index idx
8428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8444 \begin_layout Subsection
8448 \begin_layout Standard
8452 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8454 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8456 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8458 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8470 \begin_layout Enumerate
8474 \begin_layout Enumerate
8479 \begin_layout Enumerate
8480 ترقيم فرعي – عنصر #1
8483 \begin_layout Enumerate
8484 ترقيم فرعي – عنصر #2
8488 \begin_layout Enumerate
8492 \begin_layout Standard
8495 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8496 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8500 \begin_inset space ~
8504 \begin_inset space ~
8512 \begin_inset space ~
8516 \begin_inset space ~
8521 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8523 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8528 arg "depth-increment"
8538 arg "depth-decrement"
8556 arg "depth-increment"
8566 arg "depth-decrement"
8572 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8573 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8577 \begin_layout Standard
8580 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8581 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8582 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8583 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8584 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8587 \begin_layout Standard
8590 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8592 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8594 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8597 \begin_layout Subsection
8598 ما الذي تستطيع تفريخه وما لا تستطيع
8601 \begin_layout Standard
8604 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8605 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8608 \begin_layout Standard
8611 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8612 than a simple yes or no.
8613 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8616 \begin_layout Itemize
8619 Completely unnestable
8622 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8629 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8636 \begin_layout Standard
8639 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8640 environments have them:
8643 \begin_layout Description
8647 \begin_inset space ~
8655 \begin_inset space ~
8660 للتفريخ لا يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
8661 ولا يمكن التفريخ داخله.
8665 \begin_layout Itemize
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Itemize
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Description
8698 \begin_inset space ~
8701 كامل يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
8702 ويمكن التفريخ داخله.
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Itemize
8767 \begin_layout Description
8769 \begin_inset space ~
8772 طفيلي يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
8773 ولا يمكن التفريخ داخله.
8777 \begin_layout Itemize
8783 \begin_layout Itemize
8789 \begin_layout Itemize
8795 \begin_layout Itemize
8801 \begin_layout Itemize
8807 \begin_layout Itemize
8813 \begin_layout Itemize
8819 \begin_layout Itemize
8825 \begin_layout Itemize
8831 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 \begin_layout Itemize
8849 \begin_layout Itemize
8855 \begin_layout Itemize
8859 \begin_inset space ~
8865 \begin_layout Itemize
8872 \begin_layout Standard
8875 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8884 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8894 \begin_inset space ~
8897 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8898 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8899 nested section headings violate this.
8907 \begin_layout Subsection
8908 تفريخ أشياء أخرى: الجداول، الرياضيات، التعويم، إلخ.
8909 \begin_inset Index idx
8912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8913 تفريخ ! الجداول إلخ.
8921 \begin_layout Standard
8924 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8925 affected by nesting anyhow.
8929 \begin_layout Itemize
8933 \begin_layout Itemize
8937 \begin_layout Itemize
8941 \begin_layout Standard
8945 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8954 Figures and tables in
8958 are not affected by this.
8963 Have a look at section
8966 \begin_inset space ~
8970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8972 reference "sec:Floats"
8978 for more information about
8985 \begin_layout Standard
8989 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8990 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8994 \begin_layout Standard
8997 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9005 of its own, it behaves just like a
9006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9013 paragraph environment.
9014 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9018 \begin_layout Standard
9021 Here's an example with a table:
9024 \begin_layout Enumerate
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9034 This is (a) and it's nested.
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9047 \begin_inset Tabular
9048 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9049 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9050 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9051 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9099 \begin_layout Standard
9100 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9107 \begin_layout Enumerate
9111 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9115 \begin_layout Enumerate
9121 \begin_layout Standard
9124 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9127 \begin_layout Enumerate
9134 \begin_layout Enumerate
9137 This is (a) and it's nested.
9141 \begin_layout Standard
9142 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9150 \begin_inset Tabular
9151 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9152 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9202 \begin_layout Standard
9203 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9209 \begin_layout Enumerate
9218 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9221 \begin_layout Enumerate
9227 \begin_layout Standard
9230 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9234 \begin_layout Standard
9237 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9240 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9243 \begin_layout Enumerate
9250 \begin_layout Enumerate
9253 This is (a) and it's nested.
9256 \begin_layout Standard
9257 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9263 \begin_layout Standard
9265 \begin_inset Tabular
9266 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9267 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9268 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9269 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9318 \begin_layout Standard
9319 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9325 \begin_layout Enumerate
9329 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9336 \begin_layout Enumerate
9342 \begin_layout Standard
9345 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9351 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9352 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9356 \begin_layout Subsection
9357 الاستخدام والميزات العامة
9360 \begin_layout Standard
9363 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9364 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9373 is the innermost possible depth.
9374 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9377 \begin_layout Enumerate
9380 level #1 – outermost
9384 \begin_layout Enumerate
9391 \begin_layout Enumerate
9398 \begin_layout Enumerate
9405 \begin_layout Itemize
9412 \begin_layout Itemize
9423 \begin_layout Standard
9426 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9427 both of them in the example.
9428 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9438 For example, if we tried to nest another
9443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9450 , we would get errors.
9453 \begin_layout Subsection
9455 \begin_inset Index idx
9458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9467 \begin_layout Standard
9470 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9471 We have several examples of nested environments.
9472 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9477 مثال 1: الطية السادسة والتفريخ المختلط
9480 \begin_layout Labeling
9481 \labelwidthstring MMM
9484 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9493 \begin_layout Labeling
9494 \labelwidthstring MMM
9497 #2-a This is level #2.
9498 We created it by using
9503 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9513 arg "depth-increment"
9522 \begin_layout Labeling
9523 \labelwidthstring MMM
9526 #3-a This is level #3.
9527 This time, we just enter
9536 arg "depth-increment"
9542 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9548 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9558 arg "depth-increment"
9567 \begin_layout Standard
9574 environment, nested inside of
9575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9583 So, it's at level #4.
9584 We did this by entering
9589 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9599 arg "depth-increment"
9604 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9609 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9625 \begin_layout Standard
9632 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9637 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9645 \begin_layout Labeling
9646 \labelwidthstring MMM
9649 #4-a This is level #4.
9655 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9660 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9665 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9669 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9674 keep nesting things inside
9675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9686 \begin_layout Labeling
9687 \labelwidthstring MMM
9690 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9695 \begin_layout Labeling
9696 \labelwidthstring MMM
9699 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9700 and this is level #6.
9701 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9705 \begin_layout Labeling
9706 \labelwidthstring MMM
9709 #5-b Back to level #5.
9715 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9725 arg "depth-decrement"
9734 \begin_layout Labeling
9735 \labelwidthstring MMM
9743 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9753 arg "depth-decrement"
9758 , we're back at level #4.
9762 \begin_layout Labeling
9763 \labelwidthstring MMM
9766 #3-b Back to level #3.
9767 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9771 \begin_layout Labeling
9772 \labelwidthstring MMM
9775 #2-b Back to level #2.
9780 \begin_layout Labeling
9781 \labelwidthstring MMM
9784 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9785 After this sentence, we will enter
9789 and change the paragraph environment back to
9796 \begin_layout Standard
9799 We could have also used the
9815 environment in place of the
9820 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9827 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9830 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9833 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9846 arg "depth-increment"
9852 \begin_inset Newline newline
9855 which, we will change to the
9863 \begin_layout Enumerate
9870 environment, at level #2.
9873 \begin_layout Enumerate
9876 Notice how the nested
9880 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9884 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9888 \begin_layout Standard
9891 We ended this example by entering
9896 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9900 and reset the nesting depth by using
9905 arg "depth-decrement"
9913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9914 مثال 3: الملصقات، المستويات، وبيئة التعداد النقطي والرقمي
9915 \begin_inset Argument 1
9918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9921 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9929 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 This is level #1, in an
9936 paragraph environment.
9937 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9950 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9960 arg "depth-increment"
9966 Now, what happens if we nest an
9970 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9971 label be? An asterisk?
9975 \begin_layout Itemize
9987 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9988 So, its label is a bullet.
9989 (We got here by using
9994 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10004 arg "depth-increment"
10009 , then changing the environment to
10017 \begin_layout Itemize
10020 Here's level #4, produced using
10025 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10035 arg "depth-increment"
10041 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10046 \begin_layout Enumerate
10050 to get to level #5.
10051 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10056 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10060 , because we are in the
10068 environment (that is, it is an
10083 \begin_layout Enumerate
10090 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10091 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10095 \begin_layout Enumerate
10098 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10103 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10108 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10111 \begin_layout Enumerate
10119 arg "depth-decrement"
10124 to decrease the depth after the next
10129 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10136 \begin_layout Enumerate
10140 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10145 \begin_layout Enumerate
10149 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10150 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10154 \begin_layout Enumerate
10157 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10166 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10171 reset the counter for the label.
10175 \begin_layout Enumerate
10183 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10189 arg "depth-decrement"
10194 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10195 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10196 into the twofold-nested
10204 \begin_layout Enumerate
10207 The same thing happens if we do another
10212 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10218 arg "depth-decrement"
10223 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10226 \begin_layout Standard
10229 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10234 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10245 The number of other
10249 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10256 The same rule applies for the
10260 environment, as well.
10263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10264 مثال 4: الذهاب للجنون
10267 \begin_layout Enumerate
10270 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10271 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10272 the same detail with how we did it.
10281 \begin_layout Standard
10292 arg "depth-increment"
10300 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10301 the example in parentheses someplace.
10302 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10303 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10304 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10308 \begin_layout Enumerate
10315 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10319 \begin_layout Verse
10322 Now we will add verse.
10323 \begin_inset Newline newline
10326 It will get much worse.
10327 \begin_inset Newline newline
10338 arg "depth-increment"
10349 \begin_layout Verse
10352 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10353 \begin_inset Newline newline
10356 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10357 \begin_inset Newline newline
10365 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10373 \begin_layout Verse
10376 Here comes a table:
10380 \begin_layout Standard
10383 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10389 \begin_layout Standard
10391 \begin_inset Tabular
10392 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10393 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10444 \begin_layout Verse
10452 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10464 arg "depth-increment"
10474 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10481 \begin_inset Newline newline
10490 arg "depth-decrement"
10499 \begin_layout Enumerate
10506 : level #1) This is another item.
10507 Note that selecting a
10511 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10512 3 times to put the table inside the
10520 \begin_layout Quotation
10523 We're now ending the
10527 list and changing to
10532 We're still at level #1.
10533 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10534 The next set of paragraphs is a
10535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10542 We will nest both the
10549 \begin_inset space ~
10554 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10558 for the letter body.
10564 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10569 to preserve the depth.
10570 Remember that you need to use
10575 arg "newline-insert newline"
10580 to create multiple lines inside the
10587 \begin_inset space ~
10597 \begin_layout Right Address
10601 \begin_inset Newline newline
10604 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10605 \begin_inset Newline newline
10611 \begin_layout Address
10615 \begin_inset space ~
10621 \begin_layout Quotation
10624 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10628 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10629 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10630 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10631 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10632 as soon as possible.
10633 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10636 \begin_layout Quotation
10639 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10640 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10641 with your order, along with payment.
10644 \begin_layout Quotation
10647 We thank you again for your patience.
10650 \begin_layout Address
10654 \begin_inset Newline newline
10661 \begin_layout Quotation
10664 That ends that example!
10667 \begin_layout Standard
10670 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10671 gives you a lot of power with just
10673 We could have easily nested an
10694 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10697 \begin_layout Subsection
10699 \begin_inset Index idx
10702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10711 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10718 \begin_layout Standard
10721 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10723 For example you need two different enumerations:
10726 \begin_layout Enumerate
10731 \begin_layout Enumerate
10736 \begin_layout Enumerate
10740 \begin_layout Standard
10741 \begin_inset Separator plain
10747 \begin_layout Itemize
10753 \begin_layout Standard
10754 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10760 \begin_layout Enumerate
10764 \begin_layout Enumerate
10768 \begin_layout Enumerate
10772 \begin_layout Standard
10775 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10776 list item and use the menu
10778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10779 Separated <Name> Above
10783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10784 Separated <Name> Below
10787 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10788 ) and before or behind it the
10790 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10793 \begin_layout Standard
10796 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10797 (red arrow in LyX).
10798 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10799 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10802 \begin_layout Standard
10805 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10810 arg "paragraph-break"
10819 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10822 \begin_layout Section
10823 المسافات، ترقيم الصفحات والأسطر الفاصلة
10824 \begin_inset Index idx
10827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10836 \begin_layout Standard
10839 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10840 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10842 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10843 be broken at the end of a line.
10844 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10848 \begin_layout Subsection
10850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10852 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10857 \begin_inset Index idx
10860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10869 \begin_layout Standard
10872 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10873 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10874 ) not to break the line at
10876 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10879 \begin_layout Quote
10882 Further documentation is given in section
10883 \begin_inset Newline newline
10889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10891 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10898 \begin_layout Standard
10901 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10918 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10929 A protected space is set with
10931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10932 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10934 \begin_inset space ~
10944 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10952 \begin_layout Subsection
10954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10956 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10961 \begin_inset Index idx
10964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10973 \begin_layout Standard
10976 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10978 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10979 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10983 The length units are listed in Appendix
10986 \begin_inset space ~
10990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10992 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11000 مسافة في وسط الكلمة
11001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11003 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11008 \begin_inset Index idx
11011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11012 مسافات ! وسط الكلمة
11020 \begin_layout Standard
11023 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11024 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11025 at the ends of sentences.
11026 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11027 automatically takes care about this.
11028 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11029 followed by a period; see section
11032 \begin_inset space ~
11036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11038 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11045 To insert a normal space, select
11047 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11048 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11050 \begin_inset space ~
11060 arg "space-insert normal"
11068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11072 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11077 \begin_inset Index idx
11080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11089 \begin_layout Standard
11093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11100 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11109 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11110 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11111 inside abbreviations:
11114 \begin_layout Quote
11118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11122 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11125 \begin_layout Standard
11128 or between values and units.
11129 Compare for example this:
11130 \begin_inset Newline newline
11134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11138 \begin_inset Newline newline
11141 10 kg (normal space
11144 \begin_layout Standard
11147 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11150 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11152 \begin_inset space ~
11162 arg "space-insert thin"
11170 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11174 \begin_layout Standard
11175 يمكنك إدراج أنواع المسافات التالية:
11178 \begin_layout Description
11182 \begin_inset space ~
11186 \begin_inset space ~
11189 space A line with a
11190 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11194 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11198 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11201 negative thin space between the arrows.
11204 \begin_layout Description
11208 \begin_inset space ~
11212 \begin_inset space ~
11215 space A line with a
11216 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11220 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11224 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11227 negative medium space between the arrows.
11230 \begin_layout Description
11234 \begin_inset space ~
11238 \begin_inset space ~
11241 space A line with a
11242 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11246 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11250 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11253 negative thick space between the arrows.
11256 \begin_layout Description
11260 \begin_inset space ~
11264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11268 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11272 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11276 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11280 \begin_inset space ~
11284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11287 em) space between the arrows.
11290 \begin_layout Description
11294 \begin_inset space ~
11298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11302 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11306 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11310 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11314 \begin_inset space ~
11318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11321 em) space between the arrows.
11324 \begin_layout Description
11328 \begin_inset space ~
11332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11336 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11340 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11344 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11348 \begin_inset space ~
11352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11355 em) space between the arrows.
11358 \begin_layout Description
11362 \begin_inset space ~
11366 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11370 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11375 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11382 cm space between the arrows.
11385 \begin_layout Standard
11391 \begin_inset space ~
11395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11397 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11403 lists the different space sizes.
11406 \begin_layout Standard
11407 \begin_inset Float table
11412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11413 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11418 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11422 عرض المسافات الأفقية المختلفة.
11430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11432 \begin_inset Tabular
11433 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11434 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11435 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11436 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11552 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11709 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11711 \begin_inset Index idx
11714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11723 \begin_layout Standard
11726 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11727 feature for adding extra space
11728 in a uniform fashion.
11729 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11730 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11731 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11732 equally between themselves.
11735 \begin_layout Standard
11738 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11741 \begin_layout Quote
11743 هذا في الاتجاه اليسار
11744 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11747 هذا في الاتجاه اليمين
11750 \begin_layout Quote
11753 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11757 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11763 \begin_layout Quote
11766 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11770 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11774 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11780 \begin_layout Standard
11783 That was an example in the
11789 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11793 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11797 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11800 is one in a standard paragraph.
11801 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11805 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11808 \begin_layout Standard
11811 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11814 \begin_inset space ~
11819 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11822 \begin_layout Standard
11824 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11828 \begin_inset space ~
11834 \begin_layout Standard
11836 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11840 \begin_inset space ~
11846 \begin_layout Standard
11848 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11852 \begin_inset space ~
11858 \begin_layout Standard
11860 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11864 \begin_inset space ~
11870 \begin_layout Standard
11872 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11876 \begin_inset space ~
11882 \begin_layout Standard
11884 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11888 \begin_inset space ~
11894 \begin_layout Standard
11897 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11906 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11910 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11912 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11913 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11917 option in the space dialog.
11925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11929 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11934 \begin_inset Index idx
11937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11946 \begin_layout Standard
11949 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11950 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11953 \begin_layout Standard
11954 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11959 What is correct English?:
11960 \begin_inset Newline newline
11964 \begin_inset Newline newline
11968 \begin_inset space ~
11971 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11972 \begin_inset Newline newline
11976 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11989 \begin_inset Newline newline
11993 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12008 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12014 \begin_layout Standard
12018 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12023 \begin_inset space ~
12027 \begin_inset space ~
12031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12035 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12037 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12038 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12042 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12048 \begin_inset space ~
12052 \begin_inset space ~
12056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12059 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12068 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12069 That is why it is named
12070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12078 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12079 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12083 \begin_layout Subsection
12085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12087 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12092 \begin_inset Index idx
12095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12104 \begin_layout Standard
12107 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12109 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12110 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12112 \begin_inset space ~
12118 There you find the following sizes:
12121 \begin_layout Standard
12135 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12136 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12141 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12144 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12146 \begin_inset space ~
12153 \begin_inset Index idx
12156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12164 for the paragraph separation.
12165 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12176 \begin_layout Standard
12184 \begin_inset Index idx
12187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12195 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12196 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12201 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12202 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12211 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12221 s are described in section
12222 \begin_inset space ~
12226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12228 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12237 If there are several
12241 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12242 You can therefore use
12246 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12249 \begin_layout Standard
12255 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12258 \begin_inset space ~
12262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12264 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12271 \begin_layout Standard
12274 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12285 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12286 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12298 \begin_layout Subsection
12300 \begin_inset Index idx
12303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12312 \begin_layout Standard
12313 يمكنك تغيير محاذاة الفقرة عن طريق
12315 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
12321 arg "layout-paragraph"
12325 توجد خمسة احتمالات:
12328 \begin_layout Itemize
12336 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12342 \begin_layout Itemize
12350 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12356 \begin_layout Itemize
12364 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12370 \begin_layout Itemize
12378 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12384 \begin_layout Itemize
12392 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12398 \begin_layout Standard
12401 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12402 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12403 the left and right margins.
12404 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12407 \begin_layout Standard
12409 هذه الفقرة محاذاة يمين
12412 \begin_layout Standard
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12424 \begin_layout Subsection
12426 \begin_inset Index idx
12429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12436 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12438 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12445 \begin_layout Standard
12448 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12449 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12450 force a page break where you want one.
12451 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12452 is good at page breaking.
12453 Only if you use a lot of
12457 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12458 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12461 \begin_layout Standard
12464 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12465 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12469 have to change the page breaking.
12472 \begin_layout Standard
12475 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12477 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12480 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12482 \begin_inset space ~
12488 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12491 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12493 \begin_inset space ~
12498 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12500 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12501 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12504 \begin_layout Standard
12507 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12508 at the top of a page.
12509 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12511 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12512 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12513 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12519 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12525 to learn more about
12532 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12536 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12541 \begin_inset Index idx
12544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12553 \begin_layout Standard
12556 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12557 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12558 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12559 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12560 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12563 \begin_layout Standard
12566 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12568 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12569 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12571 \begin_inset space ~
12577 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12579 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12580 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12582 \begin_inset space ~
12586 \begin_inset space ~
12591 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12592 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12595 \begin_layout Subsection
12597 \begin_inset Index idx
12600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12609 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12616 \begin_layout Standard
12619 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12621 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12624 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12626 \begin_inset space ~
12630 \begin_inset space ~
12640 arg "newline-insert newline"
12646 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12648 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12649 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12651 \begin_inset space ~
12655 \begin_inset space ~
12665 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12670 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12672 This is useful to avoid
12673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12680 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12683 \begin_layout Standard
12686 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12687 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12689 very good at line breaking.
12690 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12691 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12694 \begin_inset space ~
12698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12700 reference "sec:Quote"
12705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12707 reference "sec:Verse"
12716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12718 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12727 \begin_layout Subsection
12729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12731 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12736 \begin_inset Index idx
12739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12748 \begin_layout Standard
12752 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12763 \begin_layout Standard
12769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12772 \begin_inset space ~
12777 you can insert horizontal lines.
12778 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12779 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12780 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12783 \begin_layout Standard
12787 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12798 \begin_layout Section
12802 \begin_layout Standard
12805 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12806 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12807 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12817 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12823 for information on how this is done.
12826 \begin_layout Standard
12829 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12834 dialog via the menu
12836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12837 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12843 \begin_layout Standard
12846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12855 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12856 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12858 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12866 \begin_layout Section
12868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12870 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12877 \begin_layout Subsection
12879 \begin_inset Index idx
12882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12891 \begin_layout Standard
12894 There are two types of fonts:
12897 \begin_layout Description
12899 \begin_inset space ~
12903 \begin_inset Index idx
12906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12914 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12919 characters) in the font.
12920 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12921 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12922 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12923 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12924 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12925 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12926 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12927 \begin_inset Newline newline
12930 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12931 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12932 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12933 sizes than at small ones.
12934 \begin_inset Newline newline
12948 \begin_inset space ~
12956 \begin_layout Description
12958 \begin_inset space ~
12962 \begin_inset Index idx
12965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12973 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12974 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12975 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12976 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12977 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12978 image manipulation program.
12979 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12980 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12981 \begin_inset space ~
12984 pixels high up to 34
12985 \begin_inset space ~
12988 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12989 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12990 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12992 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12993 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12994 \begin_inset Newline newline
12997 Bitmap fonts are named
13000 \begin_inset space ~
13005 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13008 \begin_layout Standard
13011 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13012 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13013 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13014 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13015 use scalable fonts.
13018 \begin_layout Standard
13021 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13024 \begin_layout Standard
13027 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13028 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13029 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13030 font to emphasize text, you use an
13031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13039 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13041 In \SpecialChar LyX
13042 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13046 \begin_layout Subsection
13047 دعم الخطوط في لتيك \SpecialChar LaTeX
13049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13051 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13058 \begin_layout Standard
13061 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13062 used its own fonts.
13063 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13064 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13067 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13068 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13069 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13070 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13071 to a word processor.
13072 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13073 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13074 files are very portable across
13075 different machines.
13076 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13077 has increased a lot
13078 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13081 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13083 \begin_inset space ~
13087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13089 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13094 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13095 code in the document
13096 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13099 \begin_layout Standard
13102 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13103 engines that are also able directly
13104 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13106 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13108 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13110 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13111 that is installed on your system.
13112 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13115 \begin_layout Standard
13118 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13127 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13128 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13136 \begin_layout Subsection
13138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13140 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13145 \begin_inset Index idx
13148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13155 \begin_inset Index idx
13158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13167 \begin_layout Standard
13170 You can set the document fonts in the
13172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13177 \begin_inset Index idx
13180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13193 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13194 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13197 \begin_inset space ~
13206 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13208 \begin_inset space ~
13211 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13214 \begin_layout Standard
13221 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13222 This requires that you use
13234 as the output format, i.
13235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13239 \begin_inset space \space{}
13242 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13243 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13244 installed (see section
13247 \begin_inset space ~
13251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13253 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13260 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13262 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13263 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13265 \begin_inset space ~
13268 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13269 cannot determine the family.
13270 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13271 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13274 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13277 \begin_layout Standard
13280 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13281 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13286 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13292 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13293 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
13296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13302 \begin_inset space ~
13308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13333 European Computer Modern
13336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13344 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13347 \begin_layout Standard
13354 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13355 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13362 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13365 \begin_inset space ~
13370 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13376 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13377 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13380 \begin_layout Itemize
13386 \begin_inset space ~
13391 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13404 \begin_inset space ~
13409 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13410 community in order to replace
13414 as the default font.
13415 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13416 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13419 \begin_inset space ~
13432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13435 One difference is improved kerning.
13443 \begin_layout Itemize
13446 If you do not like the look of
13454 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13455 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13459 \begin_inset space ~
13465 \begin_inset space ~
13475 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13476 \begin_inset space ~
13479 serif and typewriter fonts,
13483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13486 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13493 \begin_inset space ~
13502 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13507 \begin_inset space \space{}
13515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13519 \begin_inset space \space{}
13525 \begin_inset space ~
13533 \begin_inset space ~
13543 but you can also select your own.
13544 \begin_inset Newline newline
13547 The differences between roman,
13550 \begin_inset space ~
13559 fonts are explained in section
13562 \begin_inset space ~
13566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13568 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13575 \begin_inset Newline newline
13581 \begin_inset space ~
13586 was originally designed for newspapers.
13587 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13588 into the small newspaper columns.
13592 \begin_inset space ~
13597 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13600 \begin_layout Standard
13603 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13616 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13621 depends on the class you are using.
13622 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13625 \begin_layout Standard
13628 Note that the font size is the
13633 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13634 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13635 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13636 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13639 \begin_inset space ~
13645 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13648 \begin_inset space ~
13652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13654 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13661 \begin_layout Standard
13667 \begin_inset space ~
13672 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13674 \begin_inset space ~
13677 serif or typewriter.
13682 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13692 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13695 \begin_layout Standard
13702 LaTeX font encoding
13704 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13705 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13713 \begin_inset Index idx
13716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13717 حزمة لتيك ! fontenc
13727 \begin_inset space ~
13731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13733 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13740 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13741 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13748 \begin_layout Standard
13751 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13753 Use Old Style Figures
13757 Use True Small Caps
13760 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13763 Use Old Style Figures
13765 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13767 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13775 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13779 Use True Small Caps
13781 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13782 of scaled capitals.
13783 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13784 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13787 \begin_layout Standard
13794 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13795 a font to display the script characters.
13799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13802 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13810 \begin_inset Index idx
13813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13821 So this has no effect for the document language
13837 \begin_layout Standard
13842 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13844 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13845 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13852 \begin_inset Index idx
13855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13856 حزمة لتيك ! microtype
13864 \begin_layout Standard
13869 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13871 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13878 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13879 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13885 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13886 \begin_inset space ~
13890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13892 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13902 \begin_layout Standard
13905 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13909 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13918 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13923 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13924 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13926 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13928 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13931 dialog, see section
13932 \begin_inset space ~
13936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13938 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13950 \begin_layout Subsection
13954 \begin_layout Standard
13957 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13958 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13960 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13961 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13962 choose a math font in the dialog
13964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13969 \begin_inset Index idx
13972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13981 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13982 automatically selects a math font.
13983 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13984 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13993 \begin_inset space ~
13999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14004 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14005 document font is available.
14008 \begin_layout Standard
14011 Note that the math font will not be used for
14015 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14025 or by the insertion of the command
14032 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14033 \begin_inset space ~
14037 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14038 while the math characters do not.
14040 \begin_inset space ~
14043 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14046 \begin_inset space ~
14054 \begin_inset space ~
14059 in the document font settings.
14062 \begin_layout Standard
14065 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14066 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14067 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14068 font (in most cases
14069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14075 \begin_inset space ~
14081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14084 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14085 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14093 \begin_inset space ~
14099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14105 \begin_layout Subsection
14106 استخدام انساق محارف مختلفة
14107 \begin_inset Index idx
14110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14117 \begin_inset Index idx
14120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14129 \begin_layout Standard
14132 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14133 automatically changes the character style for certain
14134 paragraph environments.
14136 supports two character styles,
14145 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
14149 \begin_layout Standard
14156 style, do one of the following:
14159 \begin_layout Itemize
14160 انقر على الزر التالي في شريط الأدوات
14169 \begin_layout Itemize
14179 \begin_layout Standard
14182 These commands are all toggles.
14187 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14190 \begin_layout Standard
14193 One typically uses the
14197 style for proper names.
14199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14206 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14214 \begin_layout Standard
14217 A more widely used character style is the
14222 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14229 \begin_layout Itemize
14230 انقر على الزر التالي في شريط الأدوات
14239 \begin_layout Itemize
14249 \begin_layout Standard
14256 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14258 use a different font.
14261 \begin_layout Standard
14264 We've been using the
14268 style all over the place in this document.
14269 Here's one more example:
14272 \begin_layout Quotation
14276 Do not overuse character styles!
14279 \begin_layout Standard
14282 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14283 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14284 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14285 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
14289 \begin_layout Standard
14292 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
14304 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14306 \begin_inset space ~
14309 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14317 arg "dialog-show character"
14325 \begin_layout Subsection
14326 الضبط الدقيق من نافذة أسلوب النص
14327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14329 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14334 \begin_inset Index idx
14337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14346 \begin_layout Standard
14349 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
14351 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
14352 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14353 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14354 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14355 from ordinary dialog.
14358 \begin_layout Standard
14361 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
14362 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
14363 \begin_inset Newline newline
14366 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14367 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14370 \begin_layout Standard
14373 To use custom character styles, open the
14375 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14377 \begin_inset space ~
14380 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14383 dialog or press the toolbar button
14388 arg "dialog-show character"
14394 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14395 font property that you can choose.
14396 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14399 \begin_inset space ~
14404 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14409 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14410 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14411 environments all at once.
14414 \begin_layout Standard
14417 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
14420 \begin_inset space ~
14432 \begin_layout Labeling
14433 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14448 The possible options are:
14452 \begin_layout Labeling
14453 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14459 This is the Roman font family.
14460 Normally a serif font.
14461 It's also the default family.
14475 \begin_layout Labeling
14476 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14481 \begin_inset space ~
14488 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14504 \begin_layout Labeling
14505 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14513 This is the Typewriter font family.
14521 arg "font-typewriter"
14531 \begin_layout Labeling
14532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14538 This corresponds to the print weight.
14543 \begin_layout Labeling
14544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14550 This is the Medium font series.
14551 It's also the default series.
14554 \begin_layout Labeling
14555 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14563 This is the Bold font series.
14580 \begin_layout Labeling
14581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14587 As the name implies.
14592 \begin_layout Labeling
14593 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14599 This is the Upright font shape.
14600 It's also the default shape.
14603 \begin_layout Labeling
14604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14619 s the Italic font shape
14625 \begin_layout Labeling
14626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14634 This is the Slanted font shape
14636 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14637 , this is different from italic).
14640 \begin_layout Labeling
14641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14646 \begin_inset space ~
14653 This is the Small caps font shape
14660 \begin_layout Labeling
14661 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14667 Alters the text color.
14668 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14672 \begin_inset space ~
14677 , which means that the document default color set in
14679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14680 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14686 \begin_inset space ~
14691 is used, you can choose between
14770 \begin_inset Index idx
14773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14782 \begin_layout Labeling
14783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14789 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14790 the language of the document.
14791 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14792 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14794 \begin_inset Newline newline
14797 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14799 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14800 When using the spell checking (see section
14803 \begin_inset space ~
14807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14809 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14815 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14818 \begin_layout Labeling
14819 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14825 Alters the size of the font.
14826 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14827 proportional to the document font size.
14828 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14829 the details, but a general description of what
14835 \begin_layout Labeling
14836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14860 arg "font-size tiny"
14868 \begin_layout Labeling
14869 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14893 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14901 \begin_layout Labeling
14902 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14926 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14934 \begin_layout Labeling
14935 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14959 arg "font-size small"
14967 \begin_layout Labeling
14968 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14983 It's also the default size.
14989 arg "font-size normal"
14997 \begin_layout Labeling
14998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15022 arg "font-size large"
15030 \begin_layout Labeling
15031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15055 arg "font-size larger"
15063 \begin_layout Labeling
15064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15088 arg "font-size largest"
15096 \begin_layout Labeling
15097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15121 arg "font-size huge"
15129 \begin_layout Labeling
15130 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15154 arg "font-size giant"
15162 \begin_layout Labeling
15163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15169 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15191 arg "font-size increase"
15199 \begin_layout Labeling
15200 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15206 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15228 arg "font-size decrease"
15237 \begin_layout Standard
15244 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15245 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15247 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15248 — use those instead.
15249 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15252 \begin_layout Labeling
15253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15259 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
15264 \begin_layout Labeling
15265 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15273 This is text with emphasize on
15276 This might seem like the same as
15280 , but it is actually a bit different.
15286 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15288 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15291 \begin_layout Labeling
15292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15300 This is text with Underbar on.
15308 arg "font-underline"
15316 \begin_inset Newline newline
15321 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15322 when you could not change fonts.
15323 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15324 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15325 because some people
15329 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15332 \begin_layout Labeling
15333 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15338 \begin_inset space ~
15345 This is text with Double underbar on.
15353 arg "font-underunderline"
15359 \begin_inset Newline newline
15362 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15363 about double underbar.
15366 \begin_layout Labeling
15367 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15372 \begin_inset space ~
15379 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
15387 arg "font-underwave"
15393 \begin_inset Newline newline
15396 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15397 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15400 \begin_layout Labeling
15401 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15406 \begin_inset space ~
15413 This is text with Strikeout on.
15421 arg "font-strikeout"
15427 \begin_inset Newline newline
15430 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15431 changed in the meantime.
15434 \begin_layout Labeling
15435 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15440 \begin_inset space ~
15447 This is text with Cross out on.
15450 \begin_inset Newline newline
15453 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15456 \begin_layout Labeling
15457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15465 This is text with Noun on.
15472 , this is a logical attribute.
15473 Normally it's equivalent to
15476 \begin_inset space ~
15485 \begin_layout Standard
15488 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
15489 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
15491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15493 \begin_inset space ~
15496 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15504 arg "dialog-show character"
15509 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
15510 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
15515 arg "textstyle-apply"
15521 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
15525 \begin_layout Standard
15528 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
15539 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
15540 (suppose you just set the shape to
15541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15559 \begin_inset space ~
15571 \begin_layout Standard
15574 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
15582 \begin_inset space ~
15594 \begin_layout Itemize
15601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15608 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15626 \begin_inset Newline newline
15630 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15646 \begin_inset Note Note
15649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15652 For more on phantoms see section
15653 \begin_inset space ~
15657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15659 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15669 \begin_inset Newline newline
15675 \begin_layout Itemize
15681 fonts use characters with serifs.
15682 These are the small
15683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15690 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15691 The following example shows the difference:
15692 \begin_inset Newline newline
15696 \begin_inset Newline newline
15701 text without serifs
15704 \begin_inset Newline newline
15707 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15708 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15715 \begin_layout Itemize
15721 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15722 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15723 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15726 \begin_layout Standard
15729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15736 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15737 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15740 \begin_inset space ~
15745 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15746 the property to be removed.
15747 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15748 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15749 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15767 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15768 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15776 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15780 \begin_inset space ~
15785 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15796 If you, for example, set
15797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15815 \begin_inset space ~
15820 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15829 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15832 \begin_layout Standard
15835 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15836 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15839 \begin_layout Section
15843 \begin_layout Subsection
15847 \begin_layout Standard
15850 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15851 using \SpecialChar LyX
15852 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15853 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15854 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15855 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15857 Additional Features
15862 \begin_layout Standard
15866 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15869 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15870 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15871 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15874 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15875 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15876 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15877 to turn your writing into printable output.
15878 This happens in two stages:
15881 \begin_layout Enumerate
15884 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15885 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15887 a file with the extension,
15888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15902 \begin_layout Enumerate
15905 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15906 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15907 to use the commands in the
15911 file to produce printable output.
15914 \begin_layout Subsection
15916 \begin_inset Index idx
15919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15928 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15937 \begin_inset Index idx
15940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15949 \begin_layout Standard
15952 This file type has the extension
15953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15965 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15969 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15976 \begin_layout Standard
15979 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15981 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15982 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15984 \begin_inset space ~
15990 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15991 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15992 bibliography (section
15995 \begin_inset space ~
15999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16001 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16008 If your document includes such material, use
16010 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16011 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16013 \begin_inset space ~
16017 \begin_inset space ~
16021 \begin_inset space ~
16029 \begin_inset space ~
16033 \begin_inset space ~
16039 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16040 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16046 \begin_inset Index idx
16049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16058 \begin_layout Standard
16061 This file type has the extension
16062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16073 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16076 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16077 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16078 -Errors or to process it manually
16079 with console commands.
16080 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16081 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16082 's temporary directory whenever you
16083 view or export your document.
16086 \begin_layout Standard
16089 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16090 -file using the menu
16092 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16093 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16097 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16098 export variants are explained in section
16101 \begin_inset space ~
16105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16107 reference "subsec:Export"
16114 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16116 \begin_inset Index idx
16119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16128 \begin_layout Standard
16131 This file type has the extension
16132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16152 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16153 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16154 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16158 \begin_layout Standard
16161 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16162 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16163 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16164 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16165 when you view the DVI.
16166 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16169 \begin_layout Standard
16172 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16174 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16175 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16180 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16181 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16183 \begin_inset space ~
16189 The latter option uses the program
16191 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16197 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16200 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16201 font access (see section
16202 \begin_inset space ~
16206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16208 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16213 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16214 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16221 \begin_inset Index idx
16224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16225 هيئة الملف ! بوست سكربت
16233 \begin_layout Standard
16236 This file type has the extension
16237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16249 PostScript was developed by the company
16253 as a printer language.
16254 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16256 PostScript can be seen as a
16257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16260 programming language
16261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16264 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16271 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16279 \begin_inset Index idx
16282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16283 حزمة لتيك ! pstricks
16293 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16296 \begin_layout Standard
16299 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16303 Encapsulated PostScript
16304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16307 (EPS, file extension
16308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16320 As \SpecialChar LyX
16321 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16322 convert them in the background to EPS.
16323 If, for example, you have 50
16324 \begin_inset space ~
16327 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16329 \begin_inset space ~
16332 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16333 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16335 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16336 EPS to avoid this problem.
16339 \begin_layout Standard
16342 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16344 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16345 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16351 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16353 \begin_inset Index idx
16356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16363 \begin_inset Index idx
16366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16377 \begin_layout Standard
16380 This file type has the extension
16381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16397 Portable Document Format
16398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16405 was derived from PostScript.
16406 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16415 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16416 looks exactly the same.
16419 \begin_layout Standard
16422 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16426 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16430 (JPG, file extension
16431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16458 Portable Network Graphics
16459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16462 (PNG, file extension
16463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16475 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
16476 converts them in the
16477 background to one of these formats.
16478 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
16479 will slow down your workflow.
16480 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
16483 \begin_layout Standard
16484 يمكنك تصدير مستندك إلى PDF بعد طرق من خلال
16486 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
16490 \begin_layout Description
16494 \begin_inset space ~
16497 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16501 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16504 \begin_layout Description
16508 \begin_inset space ~
16515 ) This uses the program
16517 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16520 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16523 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16526 is a new engine, derived from
16530 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16531 access (see section
16532 \begin_inset space ~
16536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16538 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16543 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16544 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16549 \begin_layout Description
16553 \begin_inset space ~
16560 ) This uses the program
16565 that converts your file directly to PDF.
16571 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16572 font access (see section
16573 \begin_inset space ~
16577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16579 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16584 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
16585 vertically written Japanese.
16588 \begin_layout Description
16592 \begin_inset space ~
16595 (cropped) This is the same as
16598 \begin_inset space ~
16603 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
16604 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
16605 to generate good-looking
16606 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
16609 \begin_layout Description
16613 \begin_inset space ~
16616 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
16620 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
16624 \begin_layout Description
16628 \begin_inset space ~
16631 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
16635 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
16636 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
16640 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
16641 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
16644 \begin_layout Standard
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16659 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
16660 works without problems.
16661 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
16662 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
16666 \begin_inset space ~
16674 \begin_inset space ~
16679 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16689 \begin_inset Index idx
16692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16699 \begin_inset Index idx
16702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16713 \begin_layout Standard
16716 This file type has the extension
16717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16729 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16730 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16731 When \SpecialChar LyX
16732 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16733 suitable for the purpose.
16734 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16736 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16737 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16740 between different formats, which are described in section
16742 Math Output in XHTML
16747 \begin_inset space ~
16755 \begin_layout Standard
16758 XHTML output remains
16759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16766 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16767 features are supported yet.
16771 and the World Wide Web
16775 Additional Features
16777 manual, for more information.
16780 \begin_layout Standard
16783 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16785 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16786 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16792 \begin_layout Subsection
16794 \begin_inset Index idx
16797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16806 \begin_layout Standard
16809 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16810 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16819 or use the toolbar button
16830 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16831 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16832 \begin_inset space ~
16836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16838 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16842 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16844 \begin_inset space ~
16848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16850 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16855 Further output formats can be selected via
16857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16858 View (Other Formats)
16860 or the toolbar button
16871 \begin_layout Standard
16874 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16875 viewer window using the menu
16877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16883 Update (Other Formats)
16888 \begin_layout Standard
16891 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16894 To have a real output, export your document.
16897 \begin_layout Section
16898 كلمات قليلة عن الطباعة
16899 \begin_inset Index idx
16902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16911 \begin_layout Subsection
16912 الواصلات, وعلامتا الشرطة والناقص
16913 \begin_inset Index idx
16916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16923 \begin_inset Index idx
16926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16935 \begin_layout Standard
16938 In \SpecialChar LyX
16940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16951 symbol comes in four variants: the
16968 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16974 \begin_layout Standard
16977 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16987 height_special "totalheight"
16992 backgroundcolor "none"
16995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16998 \begin_inset Tabular
16999 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17000 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17001 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17002 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17003 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17004 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17005 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17039 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17040 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17085 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17086 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17114 system key combination or
17115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17128 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17129 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17157 system key combination or
17158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17172 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17189 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17230 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17236 \begin_layout Standard
17239 Dashes can also be inserted with
17241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17243 \begin_inset space ~
17246 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17254 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17255 and 2014 for the en dash).
17258 \begin_layout Standard
17261 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17262 mode and has a length of its own.
17263 Here are some examples:
17266 \begin_layout Enumerate
17269 line- and page-breaks
17270 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17280 \begin_layout Enumerate
17284 \begin_inset space ~
17288 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17298 \begin_layout Enumerate
17301 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17302 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17312 \begin_layout Enumerate
17315 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17319 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17329 \begin_layout Standard
17333 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17335 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17336 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17344 \begin_layout Subsection
17346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17348 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17355 \begin_layout Standard
17358 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17359 case and locale, e.
17360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17366 \begin_layout Itemize
17369 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17370 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17373 \begin_layout Itemize
17376 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17380 \begin_layout Itemize
17383 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17384 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17387 \begin_layout Standard
17390 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17391 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17402 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17405 \begin_layout Enumerate
17408 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17409 \begin_inset space ~
17412 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17414 The Elements of Typographic Style
17417 \begin_inset space ~
17420 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17423 \begin_layout Enumerate
17426 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17435 Prevent Hyphenation
17440 \begin_inset space ~
17456 in \SpecialChar TeX
17462 \begin_layout Itemize
17466 \begin_inset space ~
17470 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17480 height_special "totalheight"
17485 backgroundcolor "none"
17488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17499 \begin_layout Itemize
17503 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17513 height_special "totalheight"
17518 backgroundcolor "none"
17521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17525 \begin_inset space ~
17533 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17534 \begin_inset space ~
17537 – sont très utiles.
17540 \begin_layout Itemize
17547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17556 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17560 \begin_layout Standard
17563 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17564 \begin_inset space ~
17567 – in contrast to an overfull line
17568 \begin_inset space ~
17571 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17575 \begin_layout Standard
17578 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17581 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17582 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17583 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17584 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17589 \begin_layout Enumerate
17592 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17593 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
17594 or \SpecialChar TeX
17600 \begin_layout Itemize
17604 \begin_inset space ~
17607 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17608 \begin_inset space ~
17611 – sont très utiles.
17615 \begin_layout Enumerate
17618 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
17619 \begin_inset Newline newline
17624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17625 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17626 Optional line break
17632 \begin_layout Itemize
17635 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17636 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17637 should be followed by
17638 a line break opportunity.
17641 \begin_layout Standard
17644 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
17645 \begin_inset space ~
17649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17651 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17662 \begin_layout Enumerate
17665 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17666 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
17667 or en dashes (see section
17668 \begin_inset space ~
17672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17674 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17684 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17687 Changes and backwards compatibility
17690 \begin_layout Standard
17693 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
17695 \begin_inset space ~
17698 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
17699 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
17701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17708 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
17709 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
17717 \begin_layout Standard
17720 Since \SpecialChar LyX
17722 \begin_inset space ~
17725 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17727 prevents ligation to dashes.
17729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17736 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
17741 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
17742 after the input (unless the current text font is
17750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17753 The behavior was changed since
17754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17769 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
17770 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
17771 as non-breakable dashes.
17772 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
17781 \begin_layout Standard
17786 \begin_inset space ~
17794 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
17796 \begin_inset space ~
17799 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
17802 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17803 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17804 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17805 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17807 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
17811 If you used both literal and
17812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17819 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17821 \begin_inset space ~
17824 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
17825 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
17828 \begin_layout Subsection
17830 \begin_inset Index idx
17833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17842 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
17849 \begin_layout Standard
17852 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
17853 but automatically in the output.
17854 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17862 \begin_inset Index idx
17865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17873 following the rules of the document language.
17875 does not hyphenate text in the
17879 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
17882 \begin_layout Standard
17886 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17890 font and with unusual constructs, like
17891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17899 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17900 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17901 This is done with the menu
17903 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17904 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17906 \begin_inset space ~
17912 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17914 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17918 \begin_layout Standard
17921 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17922 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17933 would then see the hyphen
17934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17941 as a line break possibility.
17942 A line break at this point would look ugly.
17943 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
17946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17947 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17950 ) or put it into a makebox
17953 \begin_layout Standard
17956 as described in section
17958 Prevent Hyphenation
17963 \begin_inset space ~
17971 \begin_layout Subsection
17973 \begin_inset Index idx
17976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17986 الاختصارات ونهايات الجمل
17987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17989 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17996 \begin_layout Standard
17999 When \SpecialChar LyX
18000 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18001 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18003 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18009 appropriate amount of space.
18010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18013 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18015 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18016 gets after another word.
18019 \begin_layout Standard
18022 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18023 not work in all cases.
18025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18036 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18037 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18040 \begin_layout Standard
18043 Here are some examples of
18047 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18050 \begin_layout Itemize
18057 \begin_layout Itemize
18064 \begin_layout Standard
18067 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18070 \begin_layout Itemize
18074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18078 this is too much space!
18081 \begin_layout Itemize
18088 \begin_layout Standard
18091 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18094 \begin_layout Standard
18097 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18100 \begin_layout Enumerate
18106 \begin_inset space ~
18111 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18112 \begin_inset space ~
18116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18118 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18125 \begin_inset Index idx
18128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18129 مسافات ! وسط الكلمة
18137 \begin_layout Enumerate
18143 \begin_inset space ~
18148 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18149 \begin_inset space ~
18153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18155 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18162 \begin_inset Index idx
18165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18174 \begin_layout Enumerate
18180 \begin_inset space ~
18184 \begin_inset space ~
18188 \begin_inset space ~
18195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18197 \begin_inset space ~
18202 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18203 This function is also bound to
18208 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18216 \begin_layout Standard
18219 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18222 \begin_layout Itemize
18226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18230 \begin_inset space \space{}
18233 this is too much space!
18236 \begin_layout Itemize
18239 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18243 \begin_layout Standard
18246 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18247 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18249 will take care of this.
18252 \begin_layout Standard
18255 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18259 \begin_inset space ~
18265 feature described in the section
18267 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18272 Additional Features
18277 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18279 \begin_inset Index idx
18282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18283 طباعة ! علامات الاقتباس
18289 \begin_inset Index idx
18292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18293 علامات الاقتباس | أنظر
18297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18323 \begin_layout Standard
18327 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18328 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18329 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18339 The keyboard character,
18343 , generates this automatically.
18346 \begin_layout Standard
18349 You can specify what character the
18353 key produces by using the submenu
18359 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18364 \begin_inset Index idx
18367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18375 dialog and switching the
18379 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18380 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18382 \begin_inset space ~
18388 \begin_layout Labeling
18389 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18402 \begin_inset space ~
18406 \begin_inset space ~
18410 \begin_inset Quotes els
18414 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18428 \begin_inset Quotes els
18432 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18435 quotation marks (as common, e.
18436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18442 \begin_layout Labeling
18443 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18447 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18451 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18455 \begin_inset space ~
18459 \begin_inset space ~
18463 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18467 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18473 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18477 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18481 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18485 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18488 quotation marks (as common, e.
18489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18495 \begin_layout Labeling
18496 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18500 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18504 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18508 \begin_inset space ~
18512 \begin_inset space ~
18516 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18520 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18526 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18530 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18534 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18538 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18541 quotation marks (as common, e.
18542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18548 \begin_layout Labeling
18549 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18553 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18557 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18561 \begin_inset space ~
18565 \begin_inset space ~
18569 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18573 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18579 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18583 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18587 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18591 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18594 quotation marks (as common, e.
18595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18601 \begin_layout Labeling
18602 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18606 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18610 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18614 \begin_inset space ~
18618 \begin_inset space ~
18622 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18626 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18632 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18636 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18640 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18644 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18647 quotation marks (as common, e.
18648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18651 g., in Switzerland)
18654 \begin_layout Labeling
18655 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18659 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18663 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18667 \begin_inset space ~
18671 \begin_inset space ~
18675 \begin_inset Quotes als
18679 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18685 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18689 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18693 \begin_inset Quotes als
18697 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18700 quotation marks (as common, e.
18701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18707 \begin_layout Labeling
18708 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18712 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18716 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18720 \begin_inset space ~
18724 \begin_inset space ~
18728 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18732 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18738 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18742 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18746 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18750 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18753 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
18756 \begin_layout Labeling
18757 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18761 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18765 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18769 \begin_inset space ~
18773 \begin_inset space ~
18777 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18781 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18787 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18791 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18795 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18799 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18802 quotation marks (as common, e.
18803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18806 g., in Great Britain)
18809 \begin_layout Labeling
18810 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18814 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18818 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18822 \begin_inset space ~
18826 \begin_inset space ~
18830 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18834 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18840 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18844 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18848 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18852 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18855 quotation marks (as common, e.
18856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18862 \begin_layout Labeling
18863 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18867 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18871 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18875 \begin_inset space ~
18879 \begin_inset space ~
18883 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18887 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18893 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18897 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18901 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18905 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18908 quotation marks (another style common in France)
18912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18915 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
18916 since these look identical to the inner marks.
18917 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
18918 the inner marks differ).
18926 \begin_layout Labeling
18927 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18931 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18935 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18939 \begin_inset space ~
18943 \begin_inset space ~
18947 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18951 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18957 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18961 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18965 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18969 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18972 quotation marks (as common, e.
18973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18979 \begin_layout Labeling
18980 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18984 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18988 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18992 \begin_inset space ~
18996 \begin_inset space ~
19000 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19004 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19010 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19014 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19018 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19022 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19025 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19028 \begin_layout Standard
19031 Inner quotation marks
19035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19038 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19039 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19040 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19048 does not necessarily mean
19049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19057 This is why we call them
19058 \begin_inset Quotes els
19062 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19078 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19080 \begin_inset Quotes els
19084 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19087 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19092 arg "quote-insert inner"
19099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19105 \begin_layout Standard
19108 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19109 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19110 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19111 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19112 If you check the setting
19114 Use dynamic quotation marks
19118 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19119 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19122 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19123 they appear in a special color).
19124 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19125 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19130 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19133 \begin_layout Standard
19136 Individual quotation marks (i.
19137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19140 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19141 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19145 \begin_layout Subsection
19147 \begin_inset Index idx
19150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19157 \begin_inset Index idx
19160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19191 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19198 \begin_layout Standard
19201 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19202 print them as single characters.
19203 These groups are known as
19208 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19209 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19211 Here are the standard ligatures:
19214 \begin_layout Itemize
19220 \begin_layout Itemize
19226 \begin_layout Itemize
19232 \begin_layout Itemize
19238 \begin_layout Itemize
19244 \begin_layout Standard
19247 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19250 \begin_layout Standard
19253 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19254 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19262 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19278 To break a ligature, use
19280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19281 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19283 \begin_inset space ~
19290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19301 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19318 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19326 \begin_layout Subsection
19327 رمزي \SpecialChar LyX
19328 و \SpecialChar LaTeX
19330 \begin_inset Index idx
19333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19342 \begin_layout Standard
19347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19348 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19352 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19355 \begin_layout Description
19360 \begin_layout Description
19362 محرك المحارف المستخدم في هذا البرنامج \SpecialChar LyX
19366 \begin_layout Description
19370 The \SpecialChar TeX
19371 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19375 \begin_layout Description
19376 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19377 الإصدار الحالي من \SpecialChar LaTeX
19381 \begin_layout Standard
19384 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19390 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19398 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19399 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19400 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19401 converges to the number
19402 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19405 : The actual version is
19406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19414 , the previous one was
19415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19426 \begin_layout Subsection
19428 \begin_inset Index idx
19431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19440 \begin_layout Standard
19443 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19444 space between two words.
19445 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19455 for units use the menu
19457 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19458 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19460 \begin_inset space ~
19470 arg "space-insert thin"
19478 \begin_layout Standard
19479 هذا مثال لتشاهد الفرق:
19482 \begin_layout Standard
19483 \begin_inset Tabular
19484 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19485 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19486 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19487 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19494 \begin_inset space ~
19498 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19510 المسافة بين الرقم والوحدة
19517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19526 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 نصف المسافة بين الرقم والوحدة
19551 \begin_layout Subsection
19553 \begin_inset Index idx
19556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19557 طباعة ! نافذة وأيتام
19565 \begin_layout Standard
19568 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19570 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19571 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19572 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19573 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19574 These bits of text became known as
19585 \begin_layout Standard
19588 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19589 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19590 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19591 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19592 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19593 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19594 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19595 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19596 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19597 \begin_inset Newline newline
19605 \begin_inset Newline newline
19613 \begin_inset Newline newline
19616 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19617 preamble of your document to avoid them.
19618 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
19620 \begin_inset space ~
19624 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19626 key "latexcompanion"
19632 \begin_inset space ~
19636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19643 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19644 's page break mechanism.
19647 \begin_layout Chapter
19648 الملاحظات، الصور، الجداول والتعويم
19649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19651 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
19658 \begin_layout Standard
19661 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
19664 \begin_inset space ~
19670 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
19673 \begin_layout Section
19675 \begin_inset Index idx
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19694 \begin_layout Standard
19698 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
19701 \begin_layout Description
19706 \begin_inset space ~
19709 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
19710 \begin_inset Newline newline
19714 \begin_inset Note Note
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
19728 \begin_layout Description
19731 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
19732 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
19733 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19736 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19737 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19739 \begin_inset space ~
19745 \begin_inset Newline newline
19749 \begin_inset Note Comment
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19755 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
19764 \begin_layout Description
19768 \begin_inset space ~
19771 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
19772 set in the document settings under
19774 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
19776 \begin_inset space ~
19782 \begin_inset Newline newline
19786 \begin_inset Newline newline
19790 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19803 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
19804 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
19809 of a comment that appears in the output.
19815 \begin_inset Newline newline
19819 \begin_inset Newline newline
19822 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
19825 \begin_layout Standard
19828 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
19840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19844 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
19847 \begin_layout Section
19849 \begin_inset Index idx
19852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19861 name "sec:Footnotes"
19868 \begin_layout Standard
19872 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
19875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19878 or the toolbar button
19883 arg "footnote-insert"
19897 \begin_inset Graphics
19898 filename ../clipart/footnote.png
19907 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19908 's representation of your footnote.
19918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19937 label, the box will
19941 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19942 Clicking on the box label again will close
19955 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19956 and click on the footnote
19971 \begin_layout Standard
19974 Here is an example footnote:
19982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19993 \begin_layout Standard
19996 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19997 position where the footnote box is placed.
19998 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19999 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20000 according to the document class.
20002 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20003 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20009 ey are described in the
20012 \begin_inset space ~
20020 \begin_layout Section
20022 \begin_inset Index idx
20025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20034 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20041 \begin_layout Standard
20044 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20046 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20048 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20050 \begin_inset space ~
20055 or the toolbar button
20060 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20088 appearing within your text.
20089 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20090 's representation of your margin
20099 \begin_layout Standard
20102 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20106 \begin_inset Marginal
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 \begin_layout Standard
20122 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20123 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20124 pages, right on odd pages.
20127 \begin_layout Standard
20130 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20133 \begin_inset space ~
20141 \begin_inset space ~
20149 \begin_layout Section
20150 الصور والرسوم التوضيحية
20151 \begin_inset Index idx
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20161 \begin_inset Index idx
20164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20173 name "sec:Graphics"
20180 \begin_layout Standard
20183 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20184 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20189 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20200 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20203 \begin_layout Standard
20206 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20211 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20212 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20214 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20217 \begin_inset space ~
20221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20223 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20230 \begin_layout Standard
20237 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20238 of the image in the output.
20239 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20243 \begin_inset space ~
20247 \begin_inset space ~
20256 \begin_inset space ~
20260 \begin_inset space ~
20264 \begin_inset space ~
20269 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20270 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20278 \begin_layout Standard
20284 \begin_inset space ~
20288 \begin_inset space ~
20293 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20294 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20296 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20301 \begin_inset space ~
20306 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20307 with the image size is printed.
20310 \begin_layout Standard
20313 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20314 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20316 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20319 \begin_layout Standard
20321 \begin_inset Graphics
20322 filename ../clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20330 \begin_layout Standard
20333 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20334 the image into a float, see section
20337 \begin_inset space ~
20341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20343 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20350 \begin_layout Subsection
20352 \begin_inset Index idx
20355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20364 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20371 \begin_layout Standard
20374 You can insert images in any known file format.
20375 But as we explained in section
20376 \begin_inset space ~
20380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20382 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20386 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20388 therefore uses the program
20392 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20393 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20394 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20395 \begin_inset space ~
20399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20401 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20408 \begin_layout Standard
20411 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20414 \begin_layout Description
20418 \begin_inset space ~
20421 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20422 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20423 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20427 Graphics Interchange Format
20428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20431 (GIF, file extension
20432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20446 \begin_inset Index idx
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20485 Portable Network Graphics
20486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20489 (PNG, file extension
20490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20504 \begin_inset Index idx
20507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20543 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20547 (JPG, file extension
20548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20574 \begin_inset Index idx
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 \begin_layout Description
20614 \begin_inset space ~
20617 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20619 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20620 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20621 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20622 \begin_inset Newline newline
20625 Scalable image formats can be
20626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20629 Scalable Vector Graphics
20630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20633 (SVG, file extension
20634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20648 \begin_inset Index idx
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20687 Encapsulated PostScript
20688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20691 (EPS, file extension
20692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20706 \begin_inset Index idx
20709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20745 Portable Document Format
20746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20749 (PDF, file extension
20750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20764 \begin_inset Index idx
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20786 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
20787 result will not be scalable.
20788 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
20804 \begin_layout Standard
20807 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
20814 \begin_layout Subsection
20815 إعدادات مجموعة الصور
20816 \begin_inset Index idx
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20820 صور ! إعدادات المجموعات
20828 \begin_layout Standard
20831 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
20833 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
20834 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
20836 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
20837 need to manually change each of them.
20841 \begin_layout Standard
20844 A new group can be set by pressing the button
20847 \begin_inset space ~
20851 \begin_inset space ~
20863 \begin_inset space ~
20867 \begin_inset space ~
20873 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
20874 and checking the name of the desired group.
20877 \begin_layout Section
20879 \begin_inset Index idx
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20898 \begin_layout Standard
20901 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
20906 arg "tabular-insert"
20913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20917 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
20918 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
20919 from the rest of the table.
20920 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
20921 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
20923 Here is an example table:
20926 \begin_layout Standard
20928 \begin_inset Tabular
20929 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
20930 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20931 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20932 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21094 \begin_layout Subsection
21098 \begin_layout Standard
21101 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21104 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21108 This brings up the table dialog.
21109 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21110 cursor is placed currently.
21111 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21112 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21113 done on all of your selection.
21116 \begin_layout Standard
21119 In addition to the table dialog, the
21122 \begin_inset space ~
21127 helps you in setting table properties.
21128 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21131 \begin_layout Standard
21137 \begin_inset space ~
21142 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21143 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21144 current cell respectively.
21145 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21147 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21148 of text, see section
21151 \begin_inset space ~
21155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21157 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21164 \begin_layout Standard
21167 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21168 using the check box
21177 This will merge the cells to
21181 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21182 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21183 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21184 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21185 in the last row without the upper border:
21188 \begin_layout Standard
21190 \begin_inset Tabular
21191 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21192 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21193 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21194 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21195 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21196 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21207 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21216 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21283 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 \begin_layout Standard
21321 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21322 -arguments for the table.
21323 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21324 explained in the chapter
21331 \begin_inset space ~
21337 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21338 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21339 but are visible in the output.
21342 \begin_layout Standard
21345 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21354 Most DVI-viewers are
21358 able to display rotations.
21366 \begin_layout Standard
21373 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21378 adds lines for all cell borders.
21381 \begin_layout Subsection
21382 الجداول متعددة-الصفحات
21383 \begin_inset Index idx
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21387 جداول ! صفحات متعددة
21393 \begin_inset Index idx
21396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 جداول متعددة الصفحات
21405 \begin_layout Standard
21408 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21411 \begin_inset space ~
21415 \begin_inset space ~
21423 \begin_inset space ~
21428 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21429 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21432 \begin_layout Description
21438 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21439 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21440 Except for the first page, if
21443 \begin_inset space ~
21451 \begin_layout Description
21456 \begin_inset space ~
21461 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21462 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21465 \begin_layout Description
21471 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21472 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21473 except for the last page, if
21476 \begin_inset space ~
21484 \begin_layout Description
21489 \begin_inset space ~
21494 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21495 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21498 \begin_layout Description
21501 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21502 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21508 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21511 \begin_inset space ~
21519 \begin_layout Standard
21522 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21523 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21524 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21530 In this context, first means first in this order:
21533 \begin_inset space ~
21545 \begin_inset space ~
21550 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21553 \begin_layout Standard
21555 \begin_inset Tabular
21556 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21557 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21558 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21559 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21560 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21561 <row endfirsthead="true">
21562 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21568 مثال قائمة الهاتف (تجاهل الأسماء)
21573 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <row endfirsthead="true">
21593 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21604 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21613 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21625 <row endhead="true">
21626 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21637 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21646 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21656 <row endhead="true">
21657 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21668 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21677 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21689 <row endfoot="true">
21690 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21710 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21741 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22682 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22691 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22700 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22711 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22742 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22773 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22804 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22835 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22866 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22897 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22928 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22959 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22990 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23021 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23052 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23083 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23114 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23145 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23176 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23207 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23238 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23269 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23300 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23331 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23362 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23393 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23424 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23455 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23486 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23517 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23548 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23579 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23610 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23641 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 <row endlastfoot="true">
23672 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23683 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23692 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23709 \begin_layout Subsection
23711 \begin_inset Index idx
23714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23723 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
23730 \begin_layout Standard
23733 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
23734 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
23735 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
23736 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
23740 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
23743 \begin_layout Standard
23746 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
23747 for the column in the table dialog.
23748 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
23749 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
23753 \begin_layout Standard
23757 \begin_inset Tabular
23758 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
23759 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23760 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23761 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
23762 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23856 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 This is longer now.
23920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23975 This is longer now.
23980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24007 \begin_layout Standard
24010 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24011 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24018 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24019 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24025 Selection with the mouse or with
24029 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24030 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24031 the selection from outside the table.
24034 \begin_layout Section
24036 \begin_inset Index idx
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24055 \begin_layout Subsection
24059 \begin_layout Standard
24062 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24063 have a fixed location.
24065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24072 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24080 \begin_inset space ~
24085 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24086 too many notes on the current page.
24089 \begin_layout Standard
24092 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24093 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24094 and pages without text.
24095 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24096 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24097 Floats are therefore numbered.
24098 Referencing is described in section
24099 \begin_inset space ~
24103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24105 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24112 \begin_layout Standard
24115 To insert a float, use the menu
24117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24121 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24122 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24124 After the label you can insert the caption text
24127 \begin_inset Index idx
24130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24139 paragraph within the float.
24140 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24141 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24142 left-clicking on the box label.
24143 A closed float box looks like this:
24146 \begin_inset Graphics
24147 filename ../clipart/float.png
24154 – a gray button with a red label.
24157 \begin_layout Standard
24160 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24162 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24165 \begin_layout Subsection
24166 تعويم الرسم التوضيحي
24167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24169 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24174 \begin_inset Index idx
24177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24186 \begin_layout Standard
24190 \begin_inset space ~
24194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24196 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24200 was created using the menu
24202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24203 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24211 arg "float-insert figure"
24217 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24228 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24234 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24235 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24237 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24239 \begin_inset space ~
24249 arg "layout-paragraph"
24257 \begin_layout Standard
24258 \begin_inset Float figure
24263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24265 \begin_inset Graphics
24266 filename ../clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24276 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24281 name "fig:A-star-in"
24298 \begin_layout Standard
24301 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24302 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24304 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24317 ) and refer to it using the menu
24319 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24327 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24333 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24334 vague references like
24335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24342 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24343 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24353 For more about cross-references, see section
24354 \begin_inset space ~
24358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24360 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24367 \begin_layout Standard
24370 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24371 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24372 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24373 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24374 as described in section
24375 \begin_inset space ~
24379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24381 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24387 \begin_inset space ~
24391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24393 reference "fig:Two-images"
24397 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24398 You can also set the images one below the other.
24400 \begin_inset space ~
24404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24406 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24413 reference "fig:Star"
24417 are the subfigures.
24420 \begin_layout Standard
24421 \begin_inset Float figure
24426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24431 \begin_inset Float figure
24436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24437 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24442 name "fig:Undefinable"
24454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24455 \begin_inset Graphics
24456 filename ../clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24468 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24472 \begin_inset Float figure
24477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24478 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24496 \begin_inset Graphics
24497 filename ../clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24509 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24516 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24521 name "fig:Two-images"
24538 \begin_layout Subsection
24540 \begin_inset Index idx
24543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 \begin_layout Standard
24553 تعويم الجدول يمكن إدراجه باستخدام قائمة
24555 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
24556 تعويم\SpecialChar menuseparator
24562 arg "float-insert table"
24566 وله نفس إعدادات تعويم الرسم التوضيحي باستثناء أن التعليق يكون فوق الجدول
24567 ولي تحته مثل تعليق الرسم التوضيحي ويبدأ التعليق بكلمة جدول
24568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24570 reference "tab:Table-float"
24577 \begin_layout Standard
24578 \begin_inset Float table
24583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24584 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24589 name "tab:Table-float"
24601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24603 \begin_inset Tabular
24604 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24605 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24606 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24607 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24608 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24672 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24684 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24687 \end{array}\right]$
24695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
24720 \begin_layout Subsection
24722 \begin_inset Index idx
24725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24734 \begin_layout Standard
24738 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
24739 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
24740 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
24742 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
24750 \begin_inset space ~
24758 \begin_layout Section
24760 \begin_inset Index idx
24763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24772 \begin_layout Standard
24776 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
24778 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
24779 \begin_inset space \space{}
24786 \begin_layout Standard
24789 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
24790 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
24792 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24796 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
24797 and its alignment within the page.
24800 \begin_layout Standard
24802 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24812 height_special "totalheight"
24817 backgroundcolor "none"
24820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24823 This is a minipage.
24824 The text is set in an italic style.
24827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24830 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
24831 another formatting.
24839 \begin_layout Standard
24840 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24846 \begin_layout Standard
24847 إذا وضعت صندوقين نصيين بجوار بعضهما، يمكنك استخدام
24854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24856 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
24888 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24894 \begin_layout Standard
24897 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24907 height_special "totalheight"
24912 backgroundcolor "none"
24915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24916 عالمية العلم، عالمية العلم، عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية
24923 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24927 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24937 height_special "totalheight"
24942 backgroundcolor "none"
24945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24946 عالمية العلم، عالمية العلم، عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية
24955 \begin_layout Standard
24956 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24962 \begin_layout Standard
24965 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
24967 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24974 \begin_inset space ~
24982 \begin_layout Chapter
24984 \begin_inset Index idx
24987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24994 \begin_inset Index idx
24997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25028 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25035 \begin_layout Standard
25038 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25043 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25046 \begin_layout Section
25047 محرر الرياضيات الأساسي
25048 \begin_inset Index idx
25051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 \begin_layout Standard
25063 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25084 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25086 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25087 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25088 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25096 \begin_layout Standard
25099 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25103 \begin_inset space ~
25108 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25111 \begin_layout Standard
25114 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25115 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25118 \begin_layout Standard
25121 This is a line with an inline formula
25122 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25128 \begin_layout Standard
25131 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25132 paragraph, like this one:
25135 \begin_inset Formula
25144 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25147 \begin_layout Standard
25151 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25153 For example, typing
25154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25167 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25168 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25172 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25175 \begin_inset space ~
25183 \begin_layout Subsection
25185 \begin_inset Index idx
25188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25197 \begin_layout Standard
25200 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25201 achieved with the arrow keys.
25203 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25204 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25209 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25210 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25214 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25218 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25221 \end{array}\right]$
25229 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25234 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25235 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25238 \begin_layout Standard
25244 , printed in this document as
25245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25249 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25256 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25257 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25258 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25263 For example, if you want
25264 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25272 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25282 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25286 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25291 , since in the latter case only the
25294 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25299 will be under the square root sign:
25300 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25306 \begin_layout Standard
25309 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25313 \begin_inset Formula
25315 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25326 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25327 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25330 \begin_layout Subsection
25334 \begin_layout Standard
25337 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25338 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25342 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25343 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25344 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25345 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25346 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25350 \begin_layout Subsection
25351 النص العلوي والسفلي
25352 \begin_inset Index idx
25355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25362 \begin_inset Index idx
25365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25374 \begin_layout Standard
25377 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25382 arg "math-superscript"
25392 arg "math-subscript"
25397 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25399 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25402 , type in a formula
25405 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25415 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25421 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25425 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25431 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25437 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25446 , you have to use an extra
25450 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25451 For example, if you want
25452 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25458 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25464 Subscripts are similar: To get
25465 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25471 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25479 \begin_layout Subsection
25481 \begin_inset Index idx
25484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25493 \begin_layout Standard
25496 Create a fraction either with the command
25502 or by using the icon
25507 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25515 \begin_inset space ~
25521 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25522 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25523 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25528 To move back up, press
25533 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25536 \begin_inset Formula
25538 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25541 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25549 \begin_layout Subsection
25551 \begin_inset Index idx
25554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25563 \begin_layout Standard
25564 الجذور يمكن إدراجها باستخدام الزرين
25567 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25573 arg "math-insert \\root"
25595 خاص بالجذر التربيعي فقط، أما
25604 \begin_layout Subsection
25606 \begin_inset Index idx
25609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25616 \begin_inset Index idx
25619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25628 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25635 \begin_layout Standard
25639 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25643 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25646 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25647 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25648 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25649 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25650 The sum operator will automatically place its
25651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25658 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25660 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25666 \begin_inset Formula
25668 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25675 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25679 \begin_layout Standard
25682 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25684 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25685 behind the operator and using the menu
25687 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25688 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25690 \begin_inset space ~
25694 \begin_inset space ~
25712 \begin_layout Standard
25715 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25726 \begin_inset Index idx
25729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25738 \begin_inset Formula
25740 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25745 which will place the
25746 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25758 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25759 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25765 \begin_layout Standard
25768 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25775 Have a look at section
25776 \begin_inset space ~
25780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25782 reference "subsec:Functions"
25786 for an explanation of function macros.
25789 \begin_layout Subsection
25791 \begin_inset Index idx
25794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25803 \begin_layout Standard
25806 Most math symbols can be found in the
25809 \begin_inset space ~
25814 under one of several categories; including
25831 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
25835 \begin_layout Standard
25838 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25839 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
25840 don't have to use the
25843 \begin_inset space ~
25848 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
25850 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
25853 \begin_layout Subsection
25855 \begin_inset Index idx
25858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25867 \begin_layout Standard
25870 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
25878 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
25886 \begin_inset space ~
25896 arg "math-insert \\space"
25902 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
25903 For example, the sequence
25908 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
25911 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25915 \begin_inset Graphics
25916 filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png
25923 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
25924 the space marker and enter space again several times.
25925 With every space enter the size will be changed.
25926 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
25927 , because they are negative
25929 Here are two examples:
25932 \begin_layout Standard
25943 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
25949 \begin_layout Standard
25960 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
25966 \begin_layout Subsection
25968 \begin_inset Index idx
25971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25980 name "subsec:Functions"
25987 \begin_layout Standard
25993 \begin_inset space ~
25998 contains under the button
26003 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26008 a number of function macros, such as
26009 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26013 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26021 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26028 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26029 avoid confusions, because
26030 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26034 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26040 \begin_layout Standard
26043 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26045 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26049 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26055 \begin_layout Standard
26058 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26059 are placed, as described in section
26060 \begin_inset space ~
26064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26066 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26073 \begin_layout Subsection
26075 \begin_inset Index idx
26078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26087 \begin_layout Standard
26090 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26092 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26093 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26094 commands, for example, to enter
26095 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26098 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26099 Our example is entered by typing
26104 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26111 \begin_inset space ~
26115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26117 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26121 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26124 \begin_layout Standard
26125 \begin_inset Float table
26130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26131 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26136 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26140 أسماء اللهجات والأوامر المقابلة لها.
26148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26150 \begin_inset Tabular
26151 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26152 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26155 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26212 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26248 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26284 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26320 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26356 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26392 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26428 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26464 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26500 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26536 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26557 \begin_layout Standard
26560 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26563 \begin_inset space ~
26573 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26578 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26582 \begin_layout Section
26584 \begin_inset Index idx
26587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26594 \begin_inset Index idx
26597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26606 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26616 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26618 For some purposes, using just the keys
26623 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26624 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26625 toolbar delimiter icon
26630 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26636 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26637 \begin_inset Formula
26639 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26647 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26648 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26654 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26659 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26665 \begin_inset Formula
26667 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
26675 \begin_layout Standard
26678 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
26679 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
26683 \begin_layout Standard
26686 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
26687 left side and right side.
26688 If you use the option
26691 \begin_inset space ~
26696 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
26697 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
26699 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
26704 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
26705 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
26708 \begin_layout Standard
26711 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
26712 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
26713 is to go inside the brackets.
26714 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
26719 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
26720 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
26721 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
26727 arg "math-delim ( )"
26733 \begin_layout Section
26734 المصفوفات والمعادلات متعددة الأسطر
26735 \begin_inset Index idx
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26745 \begin_inset Index idx
26748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26755 \begin_inset Index idx
26758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26759 رياضيات ! معادلة متعددة الأسطر
26767 \begin_layout Standard
26768 المصفوفات يتم إدراجها في \SpecialChar LyX
26772 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
26776 وسيتم فتح نافذة تسمح بتحديد عدد الصفوف والأعمدة.
26778 \begin_inset Formula
26780 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26791 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
26792 \begin_inset space ~
26796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26798 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26803 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
26804 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
26805 This alignment is set in the box
26810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26859 for every column as default.
26860 For example, the sequence
26861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26872 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
26873 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
26874 corresponds to the relevant column.
26875 The result will look like this:
26876 \begin_inset Formula
26879 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
26880 column & has & has\,right\\
26881 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
26890 \begin_layout Standard
26893 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
26898 arg "newline-insert newline"
26903 while the cursor is in the matrix.
26904 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
26906 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26909 or the math toolbar.
26912 \begin_layout Standard
26915 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26916 It can be created with the menu
26918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26919 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26921 \begin_inset space ~
26933 Here is an example:
26934 \begin_inset Formula
26948 \begin_layout Standard
26951 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26954 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26959 arg "newline-insert newline"
26965 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26972 arg "newline-insert newline"
26977 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26985 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26986 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26987 A new row is created by every further entry of
26992 arg "newline-insert newline"
26998 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26999 Here is an example:
27000 \begin_inset Formula
27002 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27003 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27008 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27009 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27010 \begin_inset Formula
27012 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27020 \begin_layout Standard
27023 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27030 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27031 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27034 reference "eq:asquared"
27039 The other types are described in section
27040 \begin_inset space ~
27044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27046 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27053 \begin_layout Section
27054 المعادلة المرقمة والعلامة المرجعية
27055 \begin_inset Index idx
27058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27059 رياضيات ! معادلة مرقمة
27065 \begin_inset Index idx
27068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27069 رياضيات ! معادلة مرجعية
27075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27077 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27084 \begin_layout Standard
27087 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27089 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27090 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27092 \begin_inset space ~
27096 \begin_inset space ~
27106 arg "math-number-toggle"
27112 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27113 within parentheses.
27114 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27115 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27116 the document class.
27117 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27118 separated by a dot:
27119 \begin_inset Formula
27131 arg "math-number-toggle"
27136 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27137 You can only number displayed formulas.
27140 \begin_layout Standard
27143 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27145 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27146 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27148 \begin_inset space ~
27152 \begin_inset space ~
27162 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27167 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27168 \begin_inset Formula
27171 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27177 To number all lines use the shortcut
27182 arg "math-number-toggle"
27188 \begin_layout Standard
27191 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27194 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27195 A label is inserted with the menu
27197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27210 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27211 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27212 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27224 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27225 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27226 We inserted in the following example the label
27227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27234 in the second line:
27235 \begin_inset Formula
27237 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27238 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27243 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27244 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27245 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27249 \begin_inset space ~
27259 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27265 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27266 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27267 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27268 as the formula number:
27271 \begin_layout Standard
27274 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27277 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27284 \begin_layout Standard
27287 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27288 's cross-reference box are described in section
27289 \begin_inset space ~
27293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27295 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27300 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27308 \begin_layout Standard
27311 and we can replace the equation number with any text by
27315 tag* which writing in the end of formula.
27318 \begin_layout Section
27319 تعيين المستخدم لماكرو رياضي
27320 \begin_inset Index idx
27323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27332 \begin_layout Standard
27336 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27337 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27338 Math macros are explained in section
27341 \begin_inset space ~
27353 \begin_layout Section
27357 \begin_layout Subsection
27359 \begin_inset Index idx
27362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27371 \begin_layout Standard
27374 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27375 To set a font in a formula, use the
27378 \begin_inset space ~
27388 arg "math-insert \\font"
27393 , or enter its command, listed in table
27394 \begin_inset space ~
27398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27400 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27407 \begin_layout Standard
27408 \begin_inset Float table
27413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27414 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27419 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27423 مظهر الخط والأمر الخاص به.
27431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27433 \begin_inset Tabular
27434 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27435 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27436 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27437 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27463 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27490 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27517 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27544 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27571 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27598 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27627 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27654 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27688 \begin_layout Standard
27691 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27700 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27716 \begin_layout Standard
27719 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27720 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27725 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27726 space when you need a space in the box.
27727 Here is an example where
27728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27739 denotes the set of numbers:
27740 \begin_inset Formula
27742 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
27750 \begin_layout Standard
27753 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
27754 You can, for example, put a character in
27763 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
27767 \begin_inset Newline newline
27770 So it is better not to use this feature.
27773 \begin_layout Standard
27776 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
27777 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
27781 \begin_inset Newline newline
27784 You can only print them emboldened using the command
27790 , which works like the other typeface commands:
27791 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
27797 \begin_layout Standard
27805 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
27808 \begin_layout Standard
27811 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
27813 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27814 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27816 \begin_inset space ~
27824 \begin_layout Subsection
27826 \begin_inset Index idx
27829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27838 \begin_layout Standard
27841 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
27843 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
27847 \begin_inset space ~
27851 \begin_inset space ~
27859 \begin_inset space ~
27869 arg "math-insert \\font"
27875 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27876 in black instead of blue.
27877 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
27878 Here is an example:
27879 \begin_inset Formula
27882 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
27883 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
27892 \begin_layout Subsection
27894 \begin_inset Index idx
27897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27906 \begin_layout Standard
27909 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
27910 automatically chosen in most situations.
27928 For most characters,
27936 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
27937 and certain other structures, are set larger in
27942 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
27943 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27944 thinks are appropriate.
27945 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
27950 arg "math-insert \\style"
27956 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
27957 For example, you can set
27958 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
27961 , which is normally in
27970 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
27974 The four styles are used in the following example:
27977 \begin_layout Standard
27980 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
27984 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
27988 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27992 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27998 \begin_layout Standard
28001 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28002 is set in a particular size with the menu
28004 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28006 \begin_inset space ~
28011 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28012 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28013 will be adjusted to correspond.
28014 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28025 \begin_layout Standard
28030 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28036 \begin_layout Section
28038 \begin_inset Index idx
28041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28048 \begin_inset Index idx
28051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28060 \begin_layout Standard
28064 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28065 that are in common use.
28068 \begin_layout Subsection
28072 \begin_layout Standard
28075 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28076 the document by selecting the checkbox
28079 \begin_inset space ~
28083 \begin_inset space ~
28087 \begin_inset space ~
28094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28099 \begin_inset Index idx
28102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28113 \begin_inset space ~
28119 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28120 -errors in formulas,
28121 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28124 \begin_layout Subsection
28125 أنواع معادلات حزمة AMS
28126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28128 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28133 \begin_inset Index idx
28136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28137 رياضيات ! معادلة متعددة الأسطر
28145 \begin_layout Standard
28148 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28149 provides a selection of different formula types.
28151 allows you to choose between
28172 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28173 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28180 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28183 \begin_layout Chapter
28187 \begin_layout Section
28189 \begin_inset Index idx
28192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28201 name "sec:Cross-References"
28208 \begin_layout Standard
28211 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28212 's strengths is cross-references.
28213 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28215 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28216 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28217 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28220 \begin_layout Enumerate
28224 \begin_layout Enumerate
28225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28227 name "enu:Second-item"
28234 \begin_layout Enumerate
28238 \begin_layout Standard
28241 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28246 or by pressing the toolbar button
28257 A gray label box like this:
28260 \begin_inset Graphics
28261 filename ../clipart/label.png
28267 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28269 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28304 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28305 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28321 \begin_layout Standard
28324 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28329 or the toolbar button
28334 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28340 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28343 \begin_inset Graphics
28344 filename ../clipart/reference.png
28350 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28352 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28365 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28369 \begin_layout Standard
28372 As an alternative to
28374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28377 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28382 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28383 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28385 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28401 \begin_layout Standard
28404 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28407 \begin_inset space ~
28411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28413 reference "enu:Second-item"
28420 \begin_layout Standard
28423 It is recommended to use a protected space
28427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28430 described in section
28431 \begin_inset space ~
28435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28437 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28446 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28447 line breaks between them.
28450 \begin_layout Standard
28453 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28456 \begin_layout Description
28459 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default
28462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28464 reference "fig:Two-images"
28471 \begin_layout Description
28474 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28475 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28489 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28496 \begin_layout Description
28499 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28502 \begin_inset space ~
28506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28507 LatexCommand pageref
28508 reference "fig:Two-images"
28515 \begin_layout Description
28519 \begin_inset space ~
28523 \begin_inset space ~
28526 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number
28529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28530 LatexCommand vpageref
28531 reference "fig:Two-images"
28536 \begin_inset Newline newline
28541 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28542 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28543 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28544 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28545 it prints “on the next page”.
28546 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28549 \begin_layout Description
28553 \begin_inset space ~
28557 \begin_inset space ~
28561 \begin_inset space ~
28564 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28567 reference "fig:Two-images"
28572 \begin_inset Newline newline
28575 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28581 ; otherwise it behaves like
28585 \begin_inset space ~
28589 \begin_inset space ~
28598 \begin_layout Description
28602 \begin_inset space ~
28605 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28606 \begin_inset Newline newline
28610 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28619 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28630 \begin_inset Index idx
28633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28634 حزمة لتيك ! prettyref
28640 \begin_inset Index idx
28643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28646 حزمة لتيك ! refstyle
28659 \begin_inset Newline newline
28662 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28663 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28666 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28670 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28671 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28679 is the default and preferred because
28683 supports only English documents.
28684 The format is specified by using the command
28696 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28697 preamble of the document.
28698 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28716 \begin_inset Newline newline
28723 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28728 \begin_inset Newline newline
28739 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28740 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28742 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28743 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28748 , you might do so as follows:
28749 \begin_inset Newline newline
28756 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28761 \begin_inset Newline newline
28764 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28765 the package documentation
28768 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28770 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28776 \begin_inset Newline newline
28789 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28796 \begin_layout Description
28800 \begin_inset space ~
28803 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference
28806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28807 LatexCommand nameref
28808 reference "fig:Two-images"
28815 \begin_layout Description
28819 \begin_inset space ~
28822 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28823 label for the reference
28826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28827 LatexCommand labelonly
28828 reference "fig:Two-images"
28833 \begin_inset Newline newline
28838 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28839 Code, if you want to issue a command
28840 that \SpecialChar LyX
28846 , then you may want to use the
28849 \begin_inset space ~
28854 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
28856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28864 This is the form needed for e.
28865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28869 \begin_inset space \space{}
28876 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
28877 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
28879 The varieties are adjusted in the field
28883 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
28887 \begin_layout Standard
28890 You can only use the style
28894 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
28898 is always possible.
28901 \begin_layout Standard
28904 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
28905 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
28907 Referencing formulas is explained in section
28910 \begin_inset space ~
28914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28916 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28923 \begin_layout Standard
28926 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
28930 \begin_inset space ~
28934 \begin_inset space ~
28939 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
28940 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
28943 \begin_inset space ~
28948 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
28949 You can also go back with the toolbar button
28954 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
28960 \begin_layout Standard
28963 You can change labels at any time.
28964 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
28965 do not need to think about this.
28968 \begin_layout Standard
28971 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
28973 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
28977 \begin_layout Standard
28980 References are described in detail in the section
28981 \begin_inset space ~
28991 \begin_inset space ~
28999 \begin_layout Section
29000 جدول المحتويات والقوائم الأخرى
29001 \begin_inset Index idx
29004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29011 \begin_inset Index idx
29014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29021 \begin_inset Index idx
29024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29040 \begin_layout Subsection
29042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29044 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29051 \begin_layout Standard
29054 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29057 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29059 \begin_inset space ~
29063 \begin_inset space ~
29069 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29071 If you click on it, the
29075 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29076 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29077 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29079 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29081 \begin_inset space ~
29086 that is described in section
29089 \begin_inset space ~
29093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29095 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29102 \begin_layout Standard
29105 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29106 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29108 \begin_inset space ~
29112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29114 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29118 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29120 \begin_inset space ~
29124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29126 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29130 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29132 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29135 \begin_layout Subsection
29136 قائمة الصور، الجداول، اللوغاريتمات
29137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29139 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29146 \begin_layout Standard
29149 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29151 You can insert them via the
29153 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29157 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29160 \begin_layout Section
29161 الروابط والروابط التشعبية
29162 \begin_inset Index idx
29165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29172 \begin_inset Index idx
29175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29184 \begin_layout Subsection
29186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29195 \begin_layout Standard
29198 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29206 \begin_layout Standard
29209 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29213 \begin_inset Flex URL
29216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29218 https://www.lyx.org
29226 \begin_layout Standard
29229 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29235 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29239 \begin_layout Standard
29242 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29251 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29260 \begin_layout Subsection
29262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29264 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29271 \begin_layout Standard
29274 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29279 or with the toolbar button
29290 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29299 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29300 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this
29303 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29305 name "LyX's homepage"
29306 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29313 an Email address like this:
29314 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29316 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29317 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29323 , or a link to a file.
29328 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29336 \begin_layout Standard
29339 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29352 to the link target.
29355 \begin_layout Standard
29358 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29359 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29360 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29361 the text style dialog.
29362 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29366 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29368 name "LyX's homepage"
29369 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29377 \begin_layout Standard
29380 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29384 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29386 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29387 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29391 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29393 \begin_inset Newline newline
29401 \begin_inset Newline newline
29408 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29411 \begin_layout Section
29413 \begin_inset Index idx
29416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29425 name "sec:Appendices"
29432 \begin_layout Standard
29435 Appendices are created with the menu
29437 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29439 \begin_inset space ~
29443 \begin_inset space ~
29449 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29450 as the appendix part of the book.
29451 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29454 \begin_layout Standard
29457 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29458 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29459 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29460 and the subsection number.
29461 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29465 \begin_layout Standard
29469 \begin_inset space ~
29473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29475 reference "chap:Credits"
29480 \begin_inset space ~
29484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29486 reference "subsec:Export"
29493 \begin_layout Section
29495 \begin_inset Index idx
29498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29507 name "sec:Bibliography"
29514 \begin_layout Standard
29517 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29519 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29520 \begin_inset space ~
29524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29526 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29533 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29538 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29539 \begin_inset space ~
29543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29545 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29550 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29551 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29552 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29556 using a bibliography database.
29559 \begin_layout Standard
29562 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29563 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29567 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29568 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29569 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29570 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29571 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29574 \begin_layout Subsection
29576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29578 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29585 \begin_layout Standard
29592 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29594 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29603 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29605 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29606 of ASCII characters only.
29610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29614 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29617 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29623 \begin_inset Newline newline
29627 \begin_inset Flex URL
29630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29632 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
29644 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29654 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29655 \begin_inset Newline newline
29662 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29663 the number of the entry.
29668 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29680 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29685 or the toolbar button
29690 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29696 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29697 containing the available citations.
29698 Select one or more keys from the list and
29708 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29709 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29713 \begin_layout Standard
29716 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29717 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29718 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29730 \begin_layout Standard
29736 Companion Second Edition
29739 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29741 key "latexcompanion"
29749 \begin_layout Standard
29752 The \SpecialChar LyX
29753 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29754 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29764 \begin_layout Standard
29767 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29776 \begin_inset Index idx
29779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29788 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29800 Author A and Author B(Year)
29801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29808 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29810 Then, if you select
29813 \begin_inset space ~
29818 in the document settings
29821 \begin_inset Index idx
29824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29834 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29836 \begin_inset space ~
29842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29844 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29851 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29854 \begin_layout Standard
29857 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29860 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29862 \begin_inset space ~
29872 arg "layout-paragraph"
29878 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29881 \begin_layout Subsection
29882 قاعدة بيانات ثبت المراجع
29883 \begin_inset Index idx
29886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29887 ثبت المراجع ! قاعدة البيانات
29893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29895 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29902 \begin_layout Standard
29905 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29913 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29915 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29916 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29921 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29923 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29924 your working field in a database.
29925 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29926 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29927 list for that document.
29928 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29932 \begin_layout Standard
29935 The database is a text file with the file extension
29936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29947 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
29948 The format is explained in
29951 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29960 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29962 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29964 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
29970 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
29971 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
29972 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
29976 \begin_inset Flex URL
29979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29981 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
29989 \begin_layout Standard
29993 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
29994 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29995 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
29997 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
29999 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30000 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30001 Those are addressed by
30007 \begin_inset Index idx
30010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30011 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
30019 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30020 (although it has been significantly
30021 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30033 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30034 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30035 might conversely fail to correctly
30036 handle databases that use specific
30045 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30049 \begin_layout Standard
30052 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30057 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30059 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30065 \begin_inset Index idx
30068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30083 \begin_inset space ~
30088 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30097 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30099 \begin_inset Index idx
30102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30103 ثبت المراجع ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30112 \begin_layout Standard
30115 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30123 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30125 \begin_inset space ~
30131 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30132 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30140 Add bibliography to TOC
30142 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30147 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30148 in the document or just the cited references.
30151 \begin_layout Standard
30154 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30155 style file is a text file with the file extension
30156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30167 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30168 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30169 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30170 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30172 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30180 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30181 \begin_inset Newline newline
30185 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30187 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30197 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30202 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30206 \begin_layout Standard
30209 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30214 \begin_inset Index idx
30217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30218 ثبت المراجع ! Biblatex
30224 \begin_inset Index idx
30227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30228 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
30236 \begin_layout Standard
30239 Accessing a database via
30243 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30251 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30253 \begin_inset space ~
30259 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30260 you cannot select a
30265 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30269 \begin_layout Standard
30275 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30288 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30289 file (text file with the file extension
30290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30301 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30302 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30304 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30308 \begin_layout Standard
30314 styles are not set in the
30317 \begin_inset space ~
30322 dialog, but in the document settings
30325 \begin_inset Index idx
30328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30336 However, in the dialog in the
30340 field, which is only visible if you use
30344 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30345 example how its heading will appear).
30346 These options are deescribed in detail in the
30351 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30361 \begin_layout Standard
30364 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30367 \begin_inset space ~
30371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30373 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30387 \begin_layout Standard
30390 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30391 uses a bibliography processor,
30392 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30393 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30394 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30396 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30397 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30400 \begin_layout Standard
30403 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30405 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30406 You can do this on a general level in
30408 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30409 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30410 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30413 or for individual documents in
30415 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30416 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30420 The following variants are available by default:
30423 \begin_layout Description
30426 biber a specific, modern processor
30429 \begin_inset Index idx
30432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30440 developed exclusively for
30444 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30450 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30455 makes use of; if you use the
30459 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30466 \begin_layout Description
30469 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30470 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30471 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30475 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30478 \begin_layout Description
30481 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30482 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30486 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30490 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30494 features are supported.
30497 \begin_layout Standard
30500 By default (with the
30506 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30507 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30520 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30521 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30522 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30525 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30526 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30539 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30540 -based bibliography styles).
30541 This should suit most needs.
30544 \begin_layout Standard
30547 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30548 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30549 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30554 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30555 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30556 You can adjust it in
30558 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30559 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30560 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30566 \begin_layout Standard
30569 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30570 can add below the selection.
30571 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30572 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30580 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30590 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30594 \begin_layout Standard
30598 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30600 These are explained in detail in section
30602 Customizing Bibliographies
30606 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30611 Additional Features
30616 \begin_layout Subsection
30618 \begin_inset Index idx
30621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30622 ثبت المراجع ! هيئة الاستشهاد
30628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30630 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30637 \begin_layout Standard
30640 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30645 \begin_inset space \space{}
30648 numerical citation (as
30649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30656 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30664 ) or author-year citations (as
30665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30674 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30678 \begin_layout Standard
30681 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30684 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30685 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30690 \begin_inset Index idx
30693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30701 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30707 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30708 labels, is there to use
30711 \begin_inset space ~
30722 \begin_inset space ~
30727 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30730 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30737 \begin_layout Standard
30740 With a bibliography database (see
30741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30743 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30750 ) one has in contrary to the
30754 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30755 These style formats are available:
30758 \begin_layout Description
30762 \begin_inset space ~
30765 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30766 -based approached without any additional packages
30767 (simple numeric citations).
30770 \begin_layout Description
30773 Biblatex loads the package
30780 \begin_inset Index idx
30783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30784 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
30791 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30793 Biblatex citation style
30797 Biblatex bibliography style
30800 Options to the package
30804 can be entered in the
30811 \begin_layout Description
30815 \begin_inset space ~
30819 \begin_inset space ~
30822 mode) loads the package
30826 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30827 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30839 behavior very closely.
30844 this option has some additional styles.
30849 styles are also supported by this variant.
30852 \begin_layout Description
30856 \begin_inset space ~
30859 (BibTeX) loads the package
30866 \begin_inset Index idx
30869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30870 حزمة لتيك ! jurabib
30877 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30880 \begin_layout Description
30884 \begin_inset space ~
30887 (BibTeX) loads the package
30894 \begin_inset Index idx
30897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30905 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30908 \begin_layout Standard
30919 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30921 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30930 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30932 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30933 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30935 Biblatex citation style
30938 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30944 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30948 \begin_layout Standard
30951 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30952 are available in the
30957 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30958 a name prefix such as
30959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30974 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30979 \begin_inset space \space{}
30983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30994 \begin_layout Standard
30997 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
30999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31003 \begin_inset space \space{}
31006 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31008 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31012 \begin_inset space \space{}
31016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31028 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31032 \begin_inset space ~
31040 \begin_inset space ~
31046 Here is a simple example where the text
31047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31051 \begin_inset space ~
31055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31058 appears after the reference:
31061 \begin_layout Quote
31067 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31070 key "latexcompanion"
31078 \begin_layout Standard
31081 All styles except for
31085 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31095 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31099 \begin_layout Standard
31102 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31103 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31104 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31109 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31110 multi-citation (so-called
31111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31114 qualified citation lists
31115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31121 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31126 dialog will display three columns in the field
31133 \begin_inset space ~
31141 \begin_inset space ~
31149 \begin_inset space ~
31155 If you double-click on an item's
31158 \begin_inset space ~
31166 \begin_inset space ~
31171 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31174 General text before
31180 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31183 \begin_layout Section
31185 \begin_inset Index idx
31188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31204 \begin_layout Standard
31207 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31211 \begin_inset space ~
31216 or the toolbar button
31227 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31228 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31229 by \SpecialChar LyX
31230 as the index entry.
31233 \begin_layout Standard
31236 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31239 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31241 \begin_inset space ~
31247 A light blue box labeled
31248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31259 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31260 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31264 \begin_layout Standard
31267 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31268 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31269 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31270 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31272 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31274 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31282 \begin_layout Subsection
31284 \begin_inset Index idx
31287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31296 \begin_layout Standard
31299 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31301 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31302 lists under the entry
31303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31311 First we create the entry
31312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31320 \begin_inset space ~
31324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31326 reference "subsec:Lists"
31331 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31332 \begin_inset space ~
31336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31338 reference "sec:Itemize"
31342 , we insert the command
31345 \begin_layout Standard
31352 \begin_layout Standard
31358 \begin_layout Standard
31365 \begin_layout Standard
31368 for the enumerated list in section
31369 \begin_inset space ~
31373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31375 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31382 \begin_layout Standard
31385 The exclamation mark
31386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31393 marks the grouping levels.
31394 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31395 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31396 If we don't have an index entry for
31397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31404 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31407 \begin_layout Subsection
31409 \begin_inset Index idx
31412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31421 \begin_layout Standard
31424 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31426 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31427 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31428 an index entry in section
31429 \begin_inset space ~
31433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31435 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31442 \begin_layout Standard
31446 Paragraph environments|(
31449 \begin_layout Standard
31452 and another entry at the end of section
31453 \begin_inset space ~
31457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31459 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31466 \begin_layout Standard
31470 Paragraph environments|)
31473 \begin_layout Standard
31477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31500 respectively start and end the index range.
31501 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31502 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31503 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31504 An example is the index entry
31505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31508 Document ! Settings
31509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31515 \begin_layout Subsection
31517 \begin_inset Index idx
31520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31521 فهرس ! إشارة مرجعية
31529 \begin_layout Standard
31532 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31533 We referred for example in the index entry
31534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31542 \begin_inset space ~
31546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31548 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31552 ) to the index entry
31553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31560 in the same section using the entry
31563 \begin_layout Standard
31567 GIF|see{Image formats}
31570 \begin_layout Standard
31573 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31575 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31576 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31579 \begin_layout Subsection
31581 \begin_inset Index idx
31584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31593 \begin_layout Standard
31596 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31597 follow the rules for the index order.
31598 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31606 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31608 \begin_inset space ~
31612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31614 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31623 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31624 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31651 \begin_inset Index idx
31654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31661 \begin_inset Index idx
31664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31671 \begin_inset Index idx
31674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31675 مدخل مجسم ! الفا@غاما
31682 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31683 maïs, maison, maître.
31684 To achieve this, we use the command
31687 \begin_layout Standard
31691 previous entry@current entry
31694 \begin_layout Standard
31697 In our case we want to have
31698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31713 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31716 \begin_layout Standard
31723 \begin_layout Standard
31726 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31727 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31729 See the next subsection for an example.
31732 \begin_layout Subsection
31734 \begin_inset Index idx
31737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31746 \begin_layout Standard
31749 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog
31752 \begin_inset Index idx
31755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31758 هذا مدخل مجسم إيطالي
31765 You can also format the page number using the character
31766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31773 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31774 -command without a backslash.
31775 We can write for example
31778 \begin_layout Standard
31781 رقم صفحة إيطالي:|textit
31784 \begin_layout Standard
31787 to get the page number in italic.
31790 \begin_inset Index idx
31793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31794 مدخل مجسم ! ترقيم صفحة إيطالي :|textit
31801 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31802 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31820 \begin_inset space ~
31826 Have a look at section
31827 \begin_inset space ~
31831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31833 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31837 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31841 \begin_layout Standard
31844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31853 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31857 to generate the index, see section
31858 \begin_inset space ~
31862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31864 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31873 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31878 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31879 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31882 key "latexcompanion"
31895 \begin_layout Standard
31898 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31900 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31901 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31902 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31903 If so, put the following in the preamble
31906 \begin_layout Standard
31918 \begin_layout Standard
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31929 \begin_layout Standard
31935 \begin_inset Index idx
31938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31941 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31948 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31949 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31950 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31953 \begin_layout Standard
31956 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31957 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31958 a bold font for all index entries.
31959 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31971 documentation for details,
31972 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31974 key "makeindex,xindy"
31982 \begin_layout Subsection
31984 \begin_inset Index idx
31987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31996 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32003 \begin_layout Standard
32006 If the index generation program
32010 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32011 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32015 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32016 distribution, is used.
32020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32026 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32027 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32028 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32029 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32030 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32040 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32042 dialog, see section
32043 \begin_inset space ~
32047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32049 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32054 The available options are listed and explained in
32055 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32057 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32063 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32067 \begin_layout Standard
32070 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32071 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32074 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32075 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32079 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32080 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32083 \begin_layout Subsection
32087 \begin_layout Standard
32090 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32091 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32099 next to the standard index.
32101 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32102 that add this feature.
32111 \begin_inset Index idx
32114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32115 حزمة لتيك ! splitidx
32122 package to generate multiple indexes.
32123 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32131 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32133 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32141 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32142 style, but it also includes
32143 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32144 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32152 \begin_layout Standard
32155 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32156 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32158 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32159 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32162 and select the option
32164 Use multiple Indexes
32171 already contains the standard index
32172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32180 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32181 also appear as a heading) to the
32185 input field and press the
32190 The new index now also appears in the list.
32191 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32192 label color to the new index.
32195 \begin_layout Standard
32198 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32208 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32209 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32210 are additional features:
32213 \begin_layout Itemize
32216 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32217 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32220 \begin_layout Itemize
32223 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32224 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32229 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32230 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32231 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32232 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32235 \begin_layout Itemize
32242 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32243 code in the name of the index.
32246 \begin_layout Section
32247 المصطلحات/قاموس الكلمات
32248 \begin_inset Index idx
32251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32258 \begin_inset Index idx
32261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32290 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32292 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32299 \begin_layout Standard
32302 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32303 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32304 called nomenclature or glossary.
32307 \begin_layout Standard
32310 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32318 \begin_inset Index idx
32321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32322 حزمة لتيك ! nomencl
32330 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32332 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32339 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32343 \begin_layout Standard
32346 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32347 and then use the menu
32349 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32355 \begin_inset space ~
32360 or the toolbar button
32365 arg "nomencl-insert"
32372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32383 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32386 \begin_layout Standard
32389 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32390 The first is the term or
32394 that you wish to define.
32399 of the term or symbol.
32402 \begin_layout Standard
32405 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32414 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32415 code for nomenclature entries the option
32419 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32427 \begin_layout Subsection
32429 \begin_inset Index idx
32432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32441 \begin_layout Standard
32444 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32448 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32455 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32463 \begin_inset Newline newline
32471 \begin_inset Newline newline
32477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32484 character starts/ends the formula.
32485 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32486 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32498 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32508 \begin_layout Standard
32511 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32512 syntax is given in section
32513 \begin_inset space ~
32517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32519 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32526 \begin_layout Standard
32532 \begin_inset space ~
32537 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32539 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32544 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32551 in this document is:
32552 \begin_inset Newline newline
32557 dummy entry for the character
32562 \begin_inset Newline newline
32574 \begin_inset space ~
32584 font use the command
32613 \begin_layout Standard
32616 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32621 \begin_inset space \space{}
32625 \begin_inset Newline newline
32641 \begin_inset Newline newline
32644 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32645 This command will make the font of all symbols
32652 \begin_inset space ~
32660 \begin_layout Standard
32663 If the characters |
32664 \begin_inset space \space{}
32668 \begin_inset space \space{}
32672 \begin_inset space \space{}
32676 \begin_inset space \space{}
32680 \begin_inset space \space{}
32683 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32684 code they need to be escaped
32685 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32686 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32687 LatexCommand nomenclature
32688 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32689 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32697 \begin_layout Subsection
32698 فرز وترتيب المصطلحات
32699 \begin_inset Index idx
32702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32711 \begin_layout Standard
32714 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32715 -code of the symbol
32717 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32719 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32722 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32723 LatexCommand nomenclature
32725 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32733 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32737 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32738 LatexCommand nomenclature
32741 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32747 They will be sorted by
32748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32774 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32777 will be sorted before the
32781 since the character
32782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32789 is considered in sorting.
32792 \begin_layout Standard
32795 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32798 \begin_inset space ~
32803 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32804 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32806 For the example given, you can insert
32810 in this field for the
32811 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32818 will be located before
32819 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32825 \begin_layout Standard
32828 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32833 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32843 \begin_layout Subsection
32845 \begin_inset Index idx
32848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32857 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32864 \begin_layout Standard
32871 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32872 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32875 \begin_layout Description
32878 refeq Appends the phrase
32879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32894 to every nomenclature entry, where
32900 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32903 \begin_layout Description
32906 refpage Appends the phrase
32907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32922 to every nomenclature entry, where
32928 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32931 \begin_layout Description
32934 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32937 \begin_layout Standard
32940 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32941 class options list in the
32943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32947 In this document the options
32954 \begin_layout Standard
32955 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32961 \begin_layout Standard
32964 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32965 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32970 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32973 \begin_layout Description
32985 \begin_layout Description
32990 nomrefpage Like the
32997 \begin_layout Description
33002 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33011 \begin_layout Description
33017 \begin_inset space ~
33023 \begin_inset space ~
33028 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33031 \begin_layout Standard
33035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33042 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33043 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33047 \begin_layout Standard
33057 \begin_inset Newline newline
33063 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33069 \begin_inset space ~
33081 unskip, see equation
33084 \begin_inset Newline newline
33091 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33092 \begin_inset Newline newline
33098 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33104 \begin_inset space ~
33121 \begin_layout Standard
33124 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33127 \begin_inset space ~
33132 in the document settings under
33135 \begin_inset space ~
33143 \begin_layout Standard
33152 \begin_inset Newline newline
33156 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33162 \begin_inset space ~
33174 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33176 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33177 \begin_inset Newline newline
33184 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33185 \begin_inset Newline newline
33189 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33195 \begin_inset space ~
33207 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33212 \begin_layout Subsection
33214 \begin_inset Index idx
33217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33226 \begin_layout Standard
33229 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33232 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
33237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33248 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33249 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33250 You can choose between these settings:
33253 \begin_layout Description
33254 افتراضي المسافة المستخدمة 1
33255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33261 \begin_layout Description
33263 \begin_inset space ~
33267 \begin_inset space ~
33270 طويل the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33273 \begin_layout Description
33277 \begin_layout Standard
33280 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33289 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33297 For example, in order to change the name to
33301 , add the following line to the preamble:
33304 \begin_layout Standard
33318 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33321 \begin_layout Standard
33324 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33325 \begin_inset Newline newline
33340 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33343 \begin_layout Subsection
33345 \begin_inset Index idx
33348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33357 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33364 \begin_layout Standard
33372 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33373 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33375 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33380 by adding options, see section
33381 \begin_inset space ~
33385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33387 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33392 The available options are listed and explained in
33393 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33395 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33403 \begin_layout Section
33405 \begin_inset Index idx
33408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33415 \begin_inset Index idx
33418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33427 name "sec:Branches"
33434 \begin_layout Standard
33437 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33438 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33439 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33440 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33443 \begin_layout Standard
33446 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33447 allows you to put text into branches.
33448 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33449 To create a branch, either select the menu
33451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33452 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33455 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33464 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33465 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33466 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33467 and whether the name of the branch should
33468 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33469 (see below for an example).
33470 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33471 to the name of the other) and to add
33472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33484 \begin_inset space ~
33487 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33488 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33491 \begin_layout Standard
33494 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33495 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33500 where you can choose a branch.
33501 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33505 \begin_layout Standard
33508 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33509 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33512 \begin_layout Standard
33515 \begin_inset Branch Question
33519 \begin_layout Standard
33524 من هو أول فيزيائي يفوز بجازة نوبل؟
33532 \begin_layout Standard
33535 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33539 \begin_layout Standard
33544 وليام كونراد رونتجن.
33552 \begin_layout Standard
33561 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33562 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33565 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33566 Consider for example a file
33567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33574 which has the above branches.
33576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33583 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33607 branch were inactive,
33608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33623 branch was active, likewise
33624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33639 branch was active, and
33640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33643 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33647 if both branches were active.
33648 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33649 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33655 \begin_layout Standard
33658 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33664 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33665 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33669 \begin_inset space ~
33677 \begin_layout Standard
33680 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33684 \begin_layout Standard
33691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33698 branch is deactivated.
33704 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33710 \begin_layout Standard
33713 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33714 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33715 definitions for each branch.
33716 For example you can define for the question branch
33720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33723 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33724 -syntax, see section
33725 \begin_inset space ~
33729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33731 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33743 \begin_layout Standard
33754 \begin_layout Standard
33765 \begin_layout Standard
33768 and for the answer branch
33771 \begin_layout Standard
33782 \begin_layout Standard
33793 \begin_layout Standard
33796 \begin_inset Branch Question
33800 \begin_layout Standard
33806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33834 \begin_layout Standard
33837 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33841 \begin_layout Standard
33847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33875 \begin_layout Standard
33878 Now it is possible to use the
33882 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33889 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33892 commands to obtain conditional output.
33893 Here is an example formula where only the
33902 \begin_inset Formula
33904 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33912 \begin_layout Standard
33915 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33923 \begin_layout Standard
33926 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33932 \begin_inset space \space{}
33935 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33937 For this advanced usage, see the
33943 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33948 \begin_layout Section
33950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33952 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33957 \begin_inset Index idx
33960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33969 \begin_layout Standard
33974 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33975 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33978 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33980 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33988 \begin_inset Index idx
33991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33992 حزمة لتيك ! hyperref
33999 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34000 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34001 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34002 part of the document.
34006 \begin_layout Standard
34009 The header information in the dialog tab
34013 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34014 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34015 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34016 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34020 \begin_inset space ~
34024 \begin_inset space ~
34029 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34030 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34031 and author entries.
34035 \begin_inset space ~
34039 \begin_inset space ~
34043 \begin_inset space ~
34048 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34051 \begin_layout Standard
34054 You can specify in the dialog tab
34058 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34063 \begin_inset space ~
34067 \begin_inset space ~
34071 \begin_inset space ~
34076 option allows long links to be split;
34079 \begin_inset space ~
34083 \begin_inset space ~
34087 \begin_inset space ~
34095 \begin_inset space ~
34100 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34108 colors the different links.
34109 The default colors are:
34112 \begin_layout Labeling
34113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34118 للروابط والروابط التشعبية
34121 \begin_layout Labeling
34122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34130 \begin_layout Labeling
34131 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34139 \begin_layout Standard
34142 but you can change these in the field
34147 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34150 \begin_layout Standard
34154 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34157 \begin_layout Standard
34164 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34165 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34166 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34169 \begin_layout Standard
34176 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34177 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34178 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34188 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34189 when opening the PDF.
34191 \begin_inset space ~
34194 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34195 \begin_inset space ~
34198 1 will only display the sections.
34201 \begin_layout Standard
34204 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34205 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34211 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34212 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34222 \begin_layout Section
34223 كود تيك وتراكيب لتيك
34224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34226 name "sec:TeX-Code-1"
34233 \begin_layout Subsection
34235 \begin_inset Index idx
34238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34247 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34254 \begin_layout Standard
34257 As \SpecialChar LyX
34258 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34259 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34260 commands and constructs,
34263 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34264 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34265 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34266 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34267 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34268 cannot support all packages and
34272 \begin_layout Standard
34275 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34276 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34277 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34281 Code box is created by the menu
34283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34285 \begin_inset space ~
34290 or by the toolbar button
34311 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34319 \begin_layout Standard
34322 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34324 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34326 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34333 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34338 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34345 , you can write the command part
34351 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34352 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34356 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34357 Code box behind the word.
34358 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34359 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34363 \begin_layout Standard
34364 \begin_inset Graphics
34365 filename ../clipart/ERT.png
34373 \begin_layout Standard
34379 \begin_layout Standard
34384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34407 \begin_layout Standard
34410 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34419 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34420 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34421 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34422 know that the command is finished.
34430 \begin_layout Subsection
34431 مدخل قصير لتراكيب لتيك
34432 \begin_inset Argument 1
34435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34442 \begin_inset Index idx
34445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34454 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34461 \begin_layout Standard
34464 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34465 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34466 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34467 uses in the background.
34468 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34469 is based on commands, you can
34470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34478 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34479 any time if you know the right commands.
34480 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34481 is the end of the day.
34482 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34483 all caption labels bold.
34484 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34486 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34490 \begin_layout Standard
34493 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34495 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34497 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34500 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34510 \begin_layout Standard
34513 As result you find that the package
34520 \begin_inset Index idx
34523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34524 حزمة لتيك ! caption
34532 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34537 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34541 \begin_inset space ~
34549 \begin_layout Standard
34555 usepackage[options]{package name}
34558 \begin_layout Standard
34561 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34562 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34563 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34564 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34567 \begin_layout Standard
34570 In your case the package name is
34575 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34580 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34581 So you add the command
34584 \begin_layout Standard
34590 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34593 \begin_layout Standard
34596 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34603 For more commands provided by the
34607 package, have a look at its documentation,
34608 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34623 \begin_layout Standard
34626 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34628 For example if you use a
34632 class, you don't need the package
34636 , you can instead write
34639 \begin_layout Standard
34645 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34650 \begin_layout Standard
34653 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34654 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34655 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34662 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34665 \begin_layout Standard
34668 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34669 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34671 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34672 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34673 Code box as described in the previous
34677 \begin_layout Standard
34680 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34681 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34686 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34694 \begin_layout Standard
34697 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34703 \begin_layout Standard
34707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34719 \begin_inset Note Note
34722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34725 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34733 \begin_layout Left Header
34734 \begin_inset Argument 1
34737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34759 \begin_inset Note Note
34762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34765 defines the header line as described below
34773 \begin_layout Center Header
34774 \begin_inset Argument 1
34777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34786 \begin_layout Right Header
34787 \begin_inset Argument 1
34790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34813 \begin_layout Left Footer
34814 \begin_inset Argument 1
34817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34840 \begin_layout Center Footer
34841 \begin_inset Argument 1
34844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34859 \begin_inset Newline newline
34865 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34871 \begin_layout Right Footer
34872 \begin_inset Argument 1
34875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34897 \begin_layout Section
34898 تخصيص رأس وتذييل الصفحات
34899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34901 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34906 \begin_inset Index idx
34909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34910 مستند ! سطر رأس/تذييل
34916 \begin_inset Index idx
34919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34928 \begin_layout Standard
34931 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34935 \begin_inset space ~
34946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34952 \begin_inset space ~
34958 As a second step add in the menu
34960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34961 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34970 Custom Header/Footerlines
34973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34977 This module offers the following 6
34978 \begin_inset space ~
34984 \begin_layout Description
34988 \begin_inset space ~
34992 \begin_inset space ~
34996 \begin_inset space ~
35000 \begin_inset space ~
35004 \begin_inset space ~
35010 \begin_layout Description
35014 \begin_inset space ~
35018 \begin_inset space ~
35022 \begin_inset space ~
35026 \begin_inset space ~
35030 \begin_inset space ~
35036 \begin_layout Standard
35039 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35040 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35043 \begin_layout Standard
35046 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35047 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35049 \begin_inset space ~
35053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35055 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35059 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35062 \begin_layout Standard
35063 \begin_inset Float figure
35069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35072 \begin_inset Tabular
35073 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35074 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35075 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35077 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35079 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35097 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35108 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35112 \begin_inset space ~
35120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35124 \begin_inset space ~
35132 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35136 \begin_inset space ~
35146 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35150 The normal text on the page goes here.
35151 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35153 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35154 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35159 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35168 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35179 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35195 \begin_inset space ~
35203 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35207 \begin_inset space ~
35217 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35235 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35253 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35258 name "fig:Page-layout"
35262 نسق الصفحة مع تخصيص الرأس والتذييل.
35275 \begin_layout Standard
35278 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35287 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35291 \begin_inset space ~
35296 is set to “Default”.
35297 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35306 \begin_layout Subsection
35310 \begin_layout Standard
35313 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35314 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35315 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35316 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35318 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35320 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35323 \begin_layout Standard
35326 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35327 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35333 \begin_inset space ~
35341 \begin_layout Description
35344 thepage طباعة رقم الصفحة الحالية
35347 \begin_layout Description
35350 Roman{page} طبعة رقم الصفحة الحالية على شكل أرقام رومانية كبيرة
35353 \begin_layout Description
35356 roman{page} طبعة رقم الصفحة الحالية على شكل أرقام رومانية صغيرة
35359 \begin_layout Description
35364 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35365 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35372 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35375 because it usually goes in a left header.
35378 \begin_layout Description
35383 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35384 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35386 It is normally used in the right header.
35389 \begin_layout Subsection
35390 الرأس/التذييل الافتراضي
35393 \begin_layout Standard
35396 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35397 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35398 footer has the page number.
35399 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35400 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35401 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35404 \begin_inset space ~
35412 \begin_layout Subsection
35416 \begin_layout Standard
35419 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35420 Some pages are different.
35421 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35422 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35423 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35424 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35425 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35429 خط الزخرفة في الرأس والتذييل
35432 \begin_layout Standard
35435 By default, you get a 0.4
35436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35439 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35440 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35452 in the following way:
35455 \begin_layout Standard
35463 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35466 \begin_layout Standard
35469 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35482 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35489 \begin_layout Standard
35492 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35494 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35495 \begin_inset space ~
35499 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35510 عدة أسطر في الرأس والتذييل
35513 \begin_layout Standard
35516 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35517 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35518 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35520 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35536 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35538 \begin_inset space ~
35546 \begin_layout Standard
35554 headheight}{height}
35557 \begin_layout Standard
35564 is a size in standard units (e.
35565 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35569 \begin_inset space \space{}
35577 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35578 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35579 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35580 logfile with the menu
35582 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35584 \begin_inset space ~
35592 \begin_inset space ~
35597 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35604 \begin_inset Index idx
35607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35608 حزمة لتيك ! fancyhdr
35616 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35617 for your header/footer.
35620 \begin_layout Subsection
35624 \begin_layout Standard
35627 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35628 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35629 This example consists of the following definition:
35632 \begin_layout Description
35636 \begin_inset space ~
35645 , empty optional argument
35648 \begin_layout Description
35652 \begin_inset space ~
35655 Header empty, empty optional argument
35658 \begin_layout Description
35662 \begin_inset space ~
35671 in the optional argument
35674 \begin_layout Description
35678 \begin_inset space ~
35687 in the optional argument
35690 \begin_layout Description
35694 \begin_inset space ~
35707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35711 \begin_inset Newline newline
35715 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35722 in the optional argument
35725 \begin_layout Description
35729 \begin_inset space ~
35738 , empty optional argument
35741 \begin_layout Description
35746 headrulewidth set to 2
35747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35753 \begin_layout Standard
35756 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35757 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35763 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35773 \begin_layout Standard
35776 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35782 \begin_layout Standard
35788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35792 pagestyle{headings}
35798 \begin_inset Note Note
35801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35804 switches back to page style with the default headings
35812 \begin_layout Section
35813 استعراض مقتطفات من مستندك
35814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35816 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35821 \begin_inset Index idx
35824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35831 \begin_inset Index idx
35834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35843 \begin_layout Standard
35847 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35848 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35849 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35852 \begin_layout Subsection
35856 \begin_layout Standard
35859 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35867 \begin_inset Index idx
35870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35871 حزمة لتيك ! preview-latex
35878 (on some systems named simply
35883 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35885 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35892 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35894 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35902 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35903 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35904 -package are automatically
35905 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35909 \begin_layout Subsection
35913 \begin_layout Standard
35916 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35917 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35919 activate the option
35922 \begin_inset space ~
35929 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35935 \begin_inset space ~
35939 \begin_inset space ~
35942 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35949 \begin_inset space ~
35962 \begin_inset space ~
35967 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35970 \begin_layout Standard
35973 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35978 \begin_inset space ~
35986 \begin_inset space ~
35994 \begin_layout Standard
35997 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35998 and when you finish
36002 \begin_layout Standard
36005 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36014 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36015 generated by activating the option
36018 \begin_inset space ~
36024 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36032 \begin_layout Subsection
36033 تحديد أجزاء المستند
36036 \begin_layout Standard
36039 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36040 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36041 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36042 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36044 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36046 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36050 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36051 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36052 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36055 \begin_layout Standard
36058 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36065 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36078 is explained in section
36080 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36085 \begin_inset space ~
36095 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36096 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36097 the final rotated boxes,
36098 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36099 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36101 Here is the result:
36104 \begin_layout Standard
36107 \begin_inset Preview
36109 \begin_layout Standard
36114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36118 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36124 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36134 height_special "totalheight"
36139 backgroundcolor "none"
36142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36167 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36173 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36195 \begin_layout Standard
36198 Previewing works also for colors.
36199 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36219 is explained in section
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36239 \begin_layout Standard
36242 \begin_inset Preview
36244 \begin_layout Standard
36248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36267 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36291 \begin_layout Standard
36294 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36300 \begin_layout Standard
36303 If \SpecialChar LyX
36304 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36305 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36306 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36307 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36308 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36309 the \SpecialChar TeX
36311 If \SpecialChar LyX
36312 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36313 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36315 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36316 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36317 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36320 \begin_layout Subsection
36321 كود \SpecialChar LaTeX
36325 \begin_layout Standard
36328 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36329 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36332 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36334 \begin_inset space ~
36339 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36341 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36343 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36344 's main window, then only this selection
36345 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36346 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36347 the source view window.
36352 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36353 ; but note that if you have
36354 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36356 not just the one which is open at the time.
36359 \begin_layout Section
36360 البحث والاستبدال المتقدم
36361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36363 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36368 \begin_inset Index idx
36371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36378 \begin_inset Index idx
36381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36390 \begin_layout Subsection
36394 \begin_layout Standard
36397 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36398 allows for searching of complex,
36399 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36401 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36402 The key-features are:
36405 \begin_layout Itemize
36408 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36409 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36410 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36414 \begin_layout Itemize
36417 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36418 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36419 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36420 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36423 \begin_layout Itemize
36426 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36427 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36428 outside of mathematics environments
36431 \begin_layout Itemize
36434 Search may be widened to a specific
36439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36446 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36447 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36454 \begin_layout Itemize
36457 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36458 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36463 \begin_inset space ~
36466 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36469 \begin_layout Subsection
36473 \begin_layout Standard
36476 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36478 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36493 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36498 ) or the toolbar button
36503 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36511 Advanced Find and Replace
36516 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36520 \begin_layout Standard
36528 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36532 \begin_inset space ~
36537 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36542 arg "paragraph-break"
36548 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36549 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36555 arg "paragraph-break"
36560 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36564 searches backwards.
36567 \begin_layout Standard
36573 \begin_inset space ~
36578 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36587 \begin_inset space ~
36592 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36599 \begin_layout Standard
36602 Mathematical formulas, such as
36603 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36606 or something more complex like
36607 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36610 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36615 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36616 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36617 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36618 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36624 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36628 \begin_layout Standard
36631 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36632 This is done by switching to the
36636 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36641 This way, entering in the
36648 \begin_layout Itemize
36651 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36652 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36655 \begin_layout Itemize
36658 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36659 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36662 \begin_layout Itemize
36665 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36666 of it only within section headings.
36667 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36668 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36672 \begin_layout Itemize
36675 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36676 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36679 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36683 \begin_layout Standard
36686 The entries made in the
36690 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36693 \begin_inset space ~
36699 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36703 button or alternatively press
36708 arg "paragraph-break"
36717 while the cursor is in the
36720 \begin_inset space ~
36728 \begin_layout Standard
36731 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36733 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36737 \begin_layout Itemize
36740 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36741 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36749 with its typewriter version
36750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36764 \begin_layout Itemize
36767 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36773 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36785 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36792 (you may want to enable the
36795 \begin_inset space ~
36803 \begin_inset space ~
36808 options and disable the
36816 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36824 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36825 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36829 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36832 , or occurrences of
36833 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36837 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36843 \begin_layout Subsection
36847 \begin_layout Standard
36850 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36857 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36861 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36871 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36877 This is done with the context menu
36879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36880 Insert Regular Expression
36882 while the cursor is in the
36887 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36888 expression matching rules
36892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36895 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36902 \begin_inset space ~
36905 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36906 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36912 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36913 same text in the document.
36914 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36915 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36918 \begin_layout Enumerate
36921 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36926 editor the fraction
36927 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36931 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36934 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36935 fractions with the given denominator.
36938 \begin_layout Enumerate
36941 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36953 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36958 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36959 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36960 Also, by inserting a
36961 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36964 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36965 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36968 \begin_layout Standard
36971 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36972 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36973 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36976 , and referring back to them through
36977 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36981 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36985 For example, try searching with the regexp
36986 \begin_inset Newline newline
36989 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36992 \begin_inset Newline newline
36995 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36998 \begin_layout Standard
37001 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37004 \begin_layout Standard
37007 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37016 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37017 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37018 sub-expressions is absolute.
37020 \begin_inset space ~
37024 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37027 always refers to the first occurrence of
37028 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37031 in all entered regexps.
37039 \begin_layout Section
37041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37043 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37048 \begin_inset Index idx
37051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37060 \begin_layout Standard
37064 has a built-in spell checker.
37067 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37074 key or the toolbar button
37079 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37084 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37085 beginning of the currently selected text.
37086 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37087 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37088 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37089 scrolled so that it is visible.
37090 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37091 n, if any could be found.
37092 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37096 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37097 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37100 \begin_layout Standard
37103 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37110 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37111 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37113 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37114 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37117 \begin_inset space ~
37127 arg "dialog-show character"
37132 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37134 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37137 \begin_layout Standard
37140 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37141 can be downloaded from here:
37142 \begin_inset Newline newline
37146 \begin_inset Flex URL
37149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37151 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37157 \begin_inset Newline newline
37161 \begin_inset space ~
37164 files for each language.
37165 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37166 \begin_inset space ~
37169 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37170 's installation subfolder
37178 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37180 \begin_inset Newline newline
37183 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37184 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37185 but in most cases these are
37201 is the language code.
37204 \begin_layout Subsection
37205 المزيد من الإعدادات
37208 \begin_layout Standard
37213 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37214 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37216 \begin_inset space ~
37219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37222 you can set the following things:
37225 \begin_layout Description
37229 \begin_inset space ~
37232 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37233 should use for spell checking.
37234 Depending on your platform,
37244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37247 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37248 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37263 \begin_inset space ~
37266 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37269 \begin_layout Description
37273 \begin_inset space ~
37276 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37277 will always use the given language
37278 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37281 \begin_layout Description
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37288 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37294 \begin_inset space \space{}
37298 This should normally not be needed.
37301 \begin_layout Description
37305 \begin_inset space ~
37309 \begin_inset space ~
37312 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37324 \begin_layout Description
37328 \begin_inset space ~
37331 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37332 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37333 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37334 appear in a context menu.
37335 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37339 \begin_layout Description
37343 \begin_inset space ~
37347 \begin_inset space ~
37351 \begin_inset space ~
37354 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37358 \begin_layout Section
37360 \begin_inset Index idx
37363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37372 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37379 \begin_layout Standard
37383 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37384 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37396 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37398 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37408 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37410 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37411 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37412 which are available for many languages.
37415 \begin_layout Standard
37418 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37419 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37423 \begin_layout Subsection
37427 \begin_layout Standard
37438 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37442 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37447 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37453 \begin_inset space ~
37461 For instance, the US English files are named:
37464 \begin_layout Itemize
37470 \begin_layout Itemize
37476 \begin_layout Standard
37487 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37488 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37491 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37492 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37493 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37495 \begin_inset space ~
37500 ) to the path where they are installed.
37504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37507 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37508 ies, typical locations are
37514 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37518 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37522 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37525 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37531 LibreOffice-<Version>
37538 On the Mac, the default location is
37540 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37541 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37542 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37543 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37544 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37545 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37553 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37554 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37555 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37562 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37563 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37565 \begin_inset Newline newline
37569 \begin_inset Flex URL
37572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37574 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37582 \begin_layout Standard
37585 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37586 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37588 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37589 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37590 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37597 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37599 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37600 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37604 \begin_layout Standard
37607 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37609 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37612 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37618 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37621 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37622 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37630 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37631 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37632 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37634 \begin_inset space ~
37639 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37642 \begin_layout Subsection
37646 \begin_layout Standard
37649 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37651 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37654 or the toolbar button
37659 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37664 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37666 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37668 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37669 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37670 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37679 ), related terms (such as
37682 \begin_inset space ~
37691 ), compounds (such as
37694 \begin_inset space ~
37703 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37712 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37715 \begin_layout Standard
37718 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37719 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37723 \begin_layout Standard
37726 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37727 the dictionary, such as the above
37731 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37736 \begin_inset space \space{}
37739 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37740 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37741 For example, looking up the word form
37745 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37750 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37755 \begin_inset space \space{}
37766 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37767 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37768 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37771 \begin_layout Section
37773 \begin_inset Index idx
37776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37783 \begin_inset Index idx
37786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37787 مستند ! سجل التعديلات
37793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37795 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37802 \begin_layout Standard
37805 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37806 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37807 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37808 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37812 \begin_inset space ~
37815 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37817 \begin_inset space ~
37825 \begin_layout Standard
37828 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37842 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37843 You can change the color in
37845 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37846 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37848 \begin_inset space ~
37852 \begin_inset space ~
37857 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37864 \begin_inset Index idx
37867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37868 لون ! سجل التعديلات
37875 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37876 's status bar when the
37877 cursor is in changed text.
37878 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37883 arg "changes-merge"
37889 \begin_layout Standard
37892 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37896 \begin_inset Index idx
37899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37900 شريط أدوات ! مراجعة
37908 \begin_layout Standard
37909 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37915 \begin_layout Standard
37916 \begin_inset Graphics
37917 filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37925 \begin_layout Standard
37926 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37932 \begin_layout Standard
37935 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37938 \begin_layout Standard
37941 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37947 \begin_layout Standard
37948 \begin_inset Tabular
37949 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37950 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37951 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37952 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37953 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37962 arg "changes-track"
37970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37979 \begin_inset space ~
37982 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37984 \begin_inset space ~
37993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38002 arg "changes-output"
38010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38019 \begin_inset space ~
38022 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38024 \begin_inset space ~
38028 \begin_inset space ~
38032 \begin_inset space ~
38041 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38064 Jumps to the next change
38070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38079 arg "change-accept"
38087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38096 \begin_inset space ~
38099 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38101 \begin_inset space ~
38110 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38119 arg "change-reject"
38127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38134 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38136 \begin_inset space ~
38139 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38141 \begin_inset space ~
38150 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38159 arg "changes-merge"
38167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38174 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38176 \begin_inset space ~
38179 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38181 \begin_inset space ~
38190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38199 arg "all-changes-accept"
38207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38216 \begin_inset space ~
38219 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38221 \begin_inset space ~
38225 \begin_inset space ~
38234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38243 arg "all-changes-reject"
38251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38260 \begin_inset space ~
38263 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38265 \begin_inset space ~
38269 \begin_inset space ~
38278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38303 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38305 \begin_inset space ~
38314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38338 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38340 \begin_inset space ~
38356 \begin_layout Standard
38359 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38365 \begin_layout Standard
38368 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38388 \begin_layout Standard
38391 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38392 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38393 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38394 the next change after the current cursor position.
38395 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38396 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38397 step to the next change.
38398 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38401 \begin_layout Standard
38404 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38405 to describe a change.
38408 \begin_layout Standard
38411 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38419 \begin_inset Index idx
38422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38423 حزمة لتيك ! dvipost
38431 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38433 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38440 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38444 \begin_layout Section
38446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38448 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38453 \begin_inset Index idx
38456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38465 \begin_layout Standard
38468 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38471 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38475 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38476 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38478 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38480 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38484 \begin_inset space ~
38488 \begin_inset space ~
38492 \begin_inset space ~
38501 \begin_inset space ~
38505 \begin_inset space ~
38509 \begin_inset space ~
38513 \begin_inset space ~
38517 \begin_inset space ~
38521 \begin_inset space ~
38526 enables the change tracking option
38529 \begin_inset space ~
38533 \begin_inset space ~
38537 \begin_inset space ~
38542 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38545 \begin_layout Section
38547 \begin_inset Index idx
38550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38559 \begin_layout Standard
38562 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38563 with any language you want.
38564 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38565 up \SpecialChar LyX
38567 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38569 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38577 \begin_layout Standard
38580 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38581 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38588 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38595 \begin_layout Subsection
38597 \begin_inset Index idx
38600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38607 \begin_inset Index idx
38610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38617 \begin_inset Index idx
38620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38629 \begin_layout Standard
38634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38635 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38638 dialog lets you set
38640 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38645 \begin_layout Standard
38652 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38657 \begin_inset space ~
38662 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38663 For details about the different encoding options see section
38664 \begin_inset space ~
38668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38670 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38677 \begin_layout Subsection
38678 ضبط خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
38679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38681 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38688 \begin_layout Standard
38691 If you have for example a U.
38692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38695 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38696 can use an alternate keymap.
38697 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38702 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38703 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38704 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38707 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38708 \begin_inset space ~
38712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38714 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38719 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38720 which one you want to use.
38723 \begin_layout Standard
38726 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38727 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38728 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38732 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38733 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38734 one to support the characters you want.
38735 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38742 \begin_layout Chapter
38745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38747 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38754 \begin_layout Standard
38757 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38758 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38759 topic inside the user's guide.
38762 \begin_layout Section
38764 \begin_inset Index idx
38767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 \begin_layout Standard
38783 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38786 \begin_layout Subsection
38790 \begin_layout Standard
38793 Creates a new document.
38796 \begin_layout Subsection
38800 \begin_layout Standard
38803 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38804 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38805 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38808 \begin_layout Subsection
38812 \begin_layout Standard
38818 \begin_layout Subsection
38822 \begin_layout Standard
38825 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38826 Click there on a file to open it.
38829 \begin_layout Subsection
38833 \begin_layout Standard
38836 Closes the current document.
38839 \begin_layout Subsection
38843 \begin_layout Standard
38846 Closes all opened documents.
38849 \begin_layout Subsection
38853 \begin_layout Standard
38856 Saves the actual document.
38859 \begin_layout Subsection
38863 \begin_layout Standard
38866 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38869 \begin_layout Subsection
38873 \begin_layout Standard
38876 Saves all opened documents.
38879 \begin_layout Subsection
38883 \begin_layout Standard
38886 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38889 \begin_layout Subsection
38893 \begin_layout Standard
38896 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38897 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38898 It is described in the section
38900 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38905 Additional Features
38910 \begin_layout Subsection
38914 \begin_layout Standard
38917 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38918 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38920 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38921 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38925 \begin_layout Standard
38928 When using the menu entry
38931 \begin_inset space ~
38936 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38940 \begin_inset space ~
38944 \begin_inset space ~
38948 \begin_inset space ~
38953 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38954 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38957 \begin_layout Subsection
38959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38961 name "subsec:Export"
38968 \begin_layout Standard
38971 You can export your document to various file formats.
38972 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38974 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38975 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38976 during its configuration.
38979 \begin_layout Standard
38982 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38984 \begin_inset space ~
38988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38990 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38997 \begin_layout Description
39004 \begin_inset space ~
39007 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39009 \begin_inset space ~
39012 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39013 \begin_inset Newline newline
39016 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39017 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39021 \begin_layout Description
39024 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39030 \begin_layout Description
39034 \begin_inset space ~
39037 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39043 \begin_layout Description
39046 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39047 's native DVI-format.
39048 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39049 files paths or file names in your document.
39051 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39058 \begin_layout Description
39061 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
39062 in files paths or file names
39065 \begin_layout Description
39069 \begin_inset space ~
39076 ) DVI-format using the program
39078 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39081 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39085 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39102 \begin_layout Description
39106 \begin_inset space ~
39109 (cropped) the same as
39113 but with cropped page margins.
39116 \begin_layout Description
39120 \begin_inset space ~
39123 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39127 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39132 \begin_layout Description
39138 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39147 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39155 \begin_layout Description
39159 \begin_inset space ~
39163 \begin_inset space ~
39166 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39170 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39178 \begin_layout Description
39183 \begin_inset space ~
39192 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39193 source that is compilable with the program
39195 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39199 \begin_layout Description
39204 \begin_inset space ~
39209 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39210 source, additionally all images used in the document
39211 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39215 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39218 \begin_layout Description
39223 \begin_inset space ~
39228 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39229 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39230 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39238 \begin_layout Description
39243 \begin_inset space ~
39252 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39253 source that is compilable with the program
39259 \begin_layout Description
39263 \begin_inset space ~
39267 \begin_inset space ~
39274 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39275 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39281 \begin_layout Description
39285 \begin_inset space ~
39288 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39289 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39295 \begin_inset space \space{}
39300 \begin_inset space ~
39304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39319 represent the version number)
39322 \begin_layout Description
39326 \begin_inset space ~
39330 \begin_inset space ~
39333 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39334 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39335 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39339 \begin_layout Description
39342 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39343 's internal XHTML engine
39346 \begin_layout Description
39350 \begin_inset space ~
39354 \begin_inset space ~
39358 \begin_inset space ~
39362 \begin_inset space ~
39365 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39370 For the conversion the program
39379 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39382 \begin_layout Description
39385 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39390 \begin_layout Description
39394 \begin_inset space ~
39397 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39399 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39402 For the conversion the program
39411 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39414 \begin_layout Description
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39421 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39422 For the conversion the program
39431 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39434 \begin_layout Description
39438 \begin_inset space ~
39441 (cropped) the same as
39444 \begin_inset space ~
39449 but with cropped page margins
39452 \begin_layout Description
39457 \begin_inset space ~
39462 PDF-format using the program
39466 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39469 \begin_layout Description
39474 \begin_inset space ~
39478 \begin_inset space ~
39486 \begin_inset space ~
39491 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39496 \begin_inset space \space{}
39499 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39503 \begin_layout Description
39508 \begin_inset space ~
39513 PDF-format using the program
39515 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39518 , produces PDF-files directly
39521 \begin_layout Description
39526 \begin_inset space ~
39531 PDF-format using the program
39535 , produces PDF-files directly
39538 \begin_layout Description
39543 \begin_inset space ~
39548 PDF-format using the program
39552 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39555 \begin_layout Description
39560 \begin_inset space ~
39565 PDF-format using the program
39570 , produces PDF-files directly
39573 \begin_layout Description
39578 \begin_inset space ~
39586 \begin_layout Description
39591 \begin_inset space ~
39595 \begin_inset space ~
39600 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39601 and then exported as text using the program
39606 \begin_layout Description
39612 PostScript format using the program
39620 options see section
39621 \begin_inset space ~
39625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39627 reference "subsec:General-output"
39634 \begin_layout Description
39637 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39638 source and also code in the statistical programming
39652 it is possible to use
39656 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39660 \begin_layout Standard
39663 If one of the menu entries
39670 \begin_inset space ~
39679 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39681 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39685 \begin_inset space ~
39689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39691 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39696 \begin_inset Index idx
39699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39708 \begin_layout Subsection
39712 \begin_layout Standard
39715 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39716 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39719 \begin_inset space ~
39723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39725 reference "sec:Paths"
39730 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39739 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39740 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39741 's preferences as described in section
39742 \begin_inset space ~
39746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39748 reference "subsec:Converters"
39755 \begin_layout Subsection
39759 \begin_layout Standard
39762 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39766 \begin_layout Subsection
39770 \begin_layout Standard
39773 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39776 \begin_layout Section
39778 \begin_inset Index idx
39781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39790 \begin_layout Subsection
39794 \begin_layout Standard
39797 Described in section
39798 \begin_inset space ~
39802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39804 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39811 \begin_layout Subsection
39812 قص، نسخ، لصق، آخر لصق، لصق خاص
39815 \begin_layout Standard
39818 Described in section
39819 \begin_inset space ~
39823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39825 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39832 \begin_layout Subsection
39836 \begin_layout Standard
39839 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39840 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39843 \begin_layout Subsection
39847 \begin_layout Standard
39850 Selects the whole document.
39853 \begin_layout Subsection
39854 بحث & استبدال (سريع)
39857 \begin_layout Standard
39860 Described in section
39861 \begin_inset space ~
39865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39867 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39874 \begin_layout Subsection
39875 بحث & استبدال (متقدم)
39878 \begin_layout Standard
39881 Described in section
39882 \begin_inset space ~
39886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39888 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39895 \begin_layout Subsection
39896 نقل الفقرة للأعلى/الأسفل
39899 \begin_layout Standard
39902 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39906 \begin_layout Subsection
39910 \begin_layout Standard
39913 Described in section
39914 \begin_inset space ~
39918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39920 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39927 \begin_layout Subsection
39929 \begin_inset Index idx
39932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39941 \begin_layout Standard
39944 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39945 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39949 \begin_layout Standard
39952 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39953 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39960 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39962 \begin_inset space ~
39970 \begin_layout Subsection
39971 الجدول و الصفوف & الأعمدة
39974 \begin_layout Standard
39977 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39978 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39979 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39982 \begin_layout Subsection
39986 \begin_layout Standard
39989 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39990 It will dissolve this inset.
39991 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39995 \begin_layout Subsection
39999 \begin_layout Standard
40002 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40003 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40006 \begin_layout Subsection
40007 زيادة/إنقاص عمق القائمة
40010 \begin_layout Standard
40013 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40015 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40022 reference "sec:Nesting"
40027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40029 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40036 \begin_layout Section
40038 \begin_inset Index idx
40041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40050 \begin_layout Standard
40053 At the bottom of the
40057 menu the opened documents are listed.
40060 \begin_layout Subsection
40061 فتح/إغلاق كل المدرجات
40064 \begin_layout Standard
40067 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40070 \begin_layout Subsection
40071 طي/عدم طي ماكرو الرياضيات
40074 \begin_layout Standard
40077 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40080 \begin_layout Standard
40083 Math macros are described in the
40090 \begin_layout Subsection
40094 \begin_layout Standard
40097 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40098 \begin_inset space ~
40102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40104 reference "sec:Navigating"
40109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40111 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40118 \begin_layout Subsection
40119 نافذة الكود المصدري
40122 \begin_layout Standard
40125 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40127 \begin_inset space ~
40131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40133 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40140 \begin_layout Subsection
40144 \begin_layout Standard
40147 Opens a window showing console messages.
40148 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40153 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40154 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40155 is processing the document.
40158 \begin_layout Subsection
40160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40162 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40167 \begin_inset Index idx
40170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40179 \begin_layout Standard
40182 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40184 All toolbars and the
40187 \begin_inset space ~
40192 can be turned on and off.
40197 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40209 \begin_inset space ~
40221 \begin_inset space ~
40226 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40230 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40237 \begin_layout Standard
40244 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40248 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40249 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40250 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40251 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40252 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40255 \begin_layout Standard
40259 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40266 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40273 \begin_layout Subsection
40277 \begin_layout Standard
40282 \begin_inset space ~
40286 \begin_inset space ~
40290 \begin_inset space ~
40294 \begin_inset space ~
40298 \begin_inset space ~
40302 \begin_inset space ~
40307 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40308 's main window vertically while
40311 \begin_inset space ~
40315 \begin_inset space ~
40319 \begin_inset space ~
40323 \begin_inset space ~
40327 \begin_inset space ~
40331 \begin_inset space ~
40336 will split it horizontally.
40337 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40338 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40339 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40340 three or more documents at the same time.
40341 To close a split view, use the menu
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40348 \begin_inset space ~
40356 \begin_layout Subsection
40360 \begin_layout Standard
40363 Closes a split view.
40366 \begin_layout Subsection
40370 \begin_layout Standard
40373 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40374 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40375 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40376 's main window fullscreen.
40377 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40378 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40381 \begin_layout Section
40383 \begin_inset Index idx
40386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40395 \begin_layout Subsection
40399 \begin_layout Standard
40402 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40403 \begin_inset space ~
40407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40409 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40420 \begin_layout Subsection
40422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40424 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40431 \begin_layout Standard
40434 Here you can insert the following characters:
40437 \begin_layout Description
40444 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40447 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40448 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40449 -packages you have installed.
40450 You can get a complete display by checking
40453 \begin_inset space ~
40459 \begin_inset Newline newline
40463 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40472 Not all characters will be visible in the
40476 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40477 dialog (see section
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40484 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40488 ) can display every character.
40496 \begin_layout Description
40499 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40503 \begin_layout Description
40507 \begin_inset space ~
40511 \begin_inset space ~
40514 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40515 \begin_inset space ~
40519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40521 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40528 \begin_layout Description
40532 \begin_inset space ~
40535 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40538 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40539 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40545 \begin_layout Description
40549 \begin_inset space ~
40552 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40555 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40556 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40562 \begin_layout Description
40566 \begin_inset space ~
40569 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40573 \begin_layout Description
40577 \begin_inset space ~
40580 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40584 \begin_layout Description
40588 \begin_inset space ~
40591 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40597 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40603 \begin_layout Description
40607 \begin_inset space ~
40610 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40614 \begin_layout Description
40618 \begin_inset space ~
40624 \begin_inset Index idx
40627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40634 \begin_inset Index idx
40637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40645 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40646 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40648 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40656 \begin_inset Index idx
40659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40668 \begin_inset Newline newline
40671 More information about this feature can be found in the
40677 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40683 \begin_layout Description
40686 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40688 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40689 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40693 \begin_layout Subsection
40697 \begin_layout Standard
40700 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40703 \begin_layout Description
40706 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40707 \begin_inset script superscript
40709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40720 \begin_layout Description
40723 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40724 \begin_inset script subscript
40726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40737 \begin_layout Description
40741 \begin_inset space ~
40744 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40745 \begin_inset space ~
40749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40751 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40758 \begin_layout Description
40762 \begin_inset space ~
40765 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40766 \begin_inset space ~
40770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40772 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40779 \begin_layout Description
40783 \begin_inset space ~
40786 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40787 \begin_inset space ~
40791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40793 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40800 \begin_layout Description
40804 \begin_inset space ~
40807 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40813 \begin_inset space \space{}
40816 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40817 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40826 To insert a fraction use the command
40831 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40835 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40844 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40851 \begin_layout Description
40855 \begin_inset space ~
40858 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40865 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40872 \begin_layout Description
40876 \begin_inset space ~
40879 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40880 \begin_inset space ~
40884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40886 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40893 \begin_layout Description
40897 \begin_inset space ~
40900 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40901 \begin_inset space ~
40905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40907 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40914 \begin_layout Description
40917 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40924 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40931 \begin_layout Description
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40938 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40939 \begin_inset space ~
40943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40945 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40952 \begin_layout Description
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40959 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40960 \begin_inset space ~
40964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40966 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40973 \begin_layout Description
40977 \begin_inset space ~
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40984 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40987 \begin_inset space ~
40991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40993 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41000 for a usage example.
41003 \begin_layout Description
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41011 \begin_inset space ~
41014 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41021 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41028 \begin_layout Description
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41035 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
41036 as described in section
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41043 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41050 \begin_layout Description
41054 \begin_inset space ~
41057 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41058 \begin_inset space ~
41062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41064 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41071 \begin_layout Description
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41078 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41079 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41087 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41094 \begin_layout Description
41098 \begin_inset space ~
41101 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41102 \begin_inset space ~
41106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41108 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41115 \begin_layout Description
41119 \begin_inset space ~
41123 \begin_inset space ~
41126 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41127 \begin_inset space ~
41131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41133 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41140 \begin_layout Subsection
41141 قائمة/جدول المحتويات
41144 \begin_layout Standard
41147 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41172 are described in section
41173 \begin_inset space ~
41177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41179 reference "sec:toc"
41188 is described in section
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41195 reference "sec:Index"
41203 is described in section
41204 \begin_inset space ~
41208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41210 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41216 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41219 is described in section
41220 \begin_inset space ~
41224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41226 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41233 \begin_layout Subsection
41237 \begin_layout Standard
41240 To insert floats, as described in section
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41247 reference "sec:Floats"
41251 and in detail the chapter
41258 \begin_inset space ~
41266 \begin_layout Subsection
41270 \begin_layout Standard
41273 To insert notes, described in section
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41280 reference "sec:Notes"
41287 \begin_layout Subsection
41291 \begin_layout Standard
41294 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41296 Branches are described in section
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41303 reference "sec:Branches"
41310 \begin_layout Subsection
41314 \begin_layout Standard
41317 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41318 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41320 An example is the document class
41321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41328 with three custom insets.
41331 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41335 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41341 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41344 \begin_layout Subsection
41346 \begin_inset Index idx
41349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41358 \begin_layout Standard
41361 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41363 For more information see chapter
41365 External Document Parts
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41374 \begin_layout Subsection
41376 \begin_inset Index idx
41379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41388 \begin_layout Standard
41391 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41392 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41407 \begin_layout Subsection
41411 \begin_layout Standard
41418 dialog as described in section
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41425 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41432 \begin_layout Subsection
41436 \begin_layout Standard
41443 as described in section
41444 \begin_inset space ~
41448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41450 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41457 \begin_layout Subsection
41461 \begin_layout Standard
41468 as described in section
41469 \begin_inset space ~
41473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41475 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41482 \begin_layout Subsection
41484 \begin_inset Index idx
41487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41494 \begin_inset Index idx
41497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41498 جداول ! صفحات متعددة ! تعليق
41506 \begin_layout Standard
41509 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41510 Floats are described in section
41511 \begin_inset space ~
41515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41517 reference "sec:Floats"
41521 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41523 Multi-page Captions
41528 \begin_inset space ~
41536 \begin_layout Subsection
41540 \begin_layout Standard
41543 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41550 reference "sec:Index"
41557 \begin_layout Subsection
41561 \begin_layout Standard
41564 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41565 \begin_inset space ~
41569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41571 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41578 \begin_layout Subsection
41582 \begin_layout Standard
41585 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41586 Tables are described in section
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41593 reference "sec:Tables"
41597 and in detail in the chapter
41604 \begin_inset space ~
41612 \begin_layout Subsection
41616 \begin_layout Standard
41624 Graphics are described in section
41625 \begin_inset space ~
41629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41631 reference "sec:Graphics"
41638 \begin_layout Subsection
41642 \begin_layout Standard
41645 Inserts a URL as described in section
41646 \begin_inset space ~
41650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41652 reference "subsec:URLs"
41659 \begin_layout Subsection
41663 \begin_layout Standard
41666 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41673 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41680 \begin_layout Subsection
41684 \begin_layout Standard
41687 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41688 \begin_inset space ~
41692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41694 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41701 \begin_layout Subsection
41705 \begin_layout Standard
41708 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41709 \begin_inset space ~
41713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41715 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41722 \begin_layout Subsection
41723 فاصل <اسم> (أعلى/أسفل)
41726 \begin_layout Standard
41729 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41730 environments of the same type.
41732 \begin_inset space ~
41736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41738 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41742 for an explanation.
41745 \begin_layout Subsection
41749 \begin_layout Standard
41752 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41753 title or caption of a float.
41754 Inserts a short title as described in section
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41761 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41768 \begin_layout Subsection
41769 كود لتيكس \SpecialChar TeX
41773 \begin_layout Standard
41776 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41777 Code box as described in section
41778 \begin_inset space ~
41782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41784 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41791 \begin_layout Subsection
41793 \begin_inset Index idx
41796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41805 \begin_layout Standard
41808 Inserts a program listings box.
41809 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41811 Program Code Listings
41816 \begin_inset space ~
41824 \begin_layout Subsection
41828 \begin_layout Standard
41831 Inserts the actual date.
41832 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41837 \begin_layout Subsection
41841 \begin_layout Standard
41844 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41845 \begin_inset space ~
41849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41851 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41858 \begin_layout Section
41860 \begin_inset Index idx
41863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41872 \begin_layout Standard
41875 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41876 \begin_inset space ~
41879 of the current document.
41880 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41883 \begin_layout Subsection
41887 \begin_layout Standard
41890 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41891 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41892 to jump, for example, between section
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41897 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41898 \begin_inset space ~
41901 2.5 and use the submenu
41904 \begin_inset space ~
41908 \begin_inset space ~
41915 \begin_inset space ~
41921 \begin_inset space ~
41925 \begin_inset space ~
41931 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41937 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41947 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41952 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41955 \begin_layout Standard
41958 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41962 \begin_inset space ~
41967 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41970 \begin_inset space ~
41975 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41978 \begin_layout Subsection
41979 الملاحظة التالية, التغيير, الإشارة المرجعية
41982 \begin_layout Standard
41985 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41989 \begin_layout Subsection
41993 \begin_layout Standard
41996 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41997 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41998 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42002 \begin_inset space ~
42006 \begin_inset space ~
42014 \begin_layout Subsection
42018 \begin_layout Standard
42021 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42024 The \SpecialChar LyX
42025 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42027 \begin_inset space ~
42035 \begin_inset space ~
42040 manual for a detailed description.
42043 \begin_layout Section
42045 \begin_inset Index idx
42048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42057 \begin_layout Subsection
42061 \begin_layout Standard
42064 Change Tracking is described in section
42065 \begin_inset space ~
42069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42071 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42078 \begin_layout Subsection
42082 \begin_layout Standard
42085 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42086 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42087 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42089 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42090 to the clipboard or update the view.
42091 \begin_inset Newline newline
42094 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42098 \begin_layout Standard
42103 Open Containing Directory
42105 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42106 's temporary folder for the document.
42107 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42108 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42109 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42110 For example some journals require to send the
42114 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42118 \begin_layout Subsection
42122 \begin_layout Standard
42125 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42126 as described in section
42127 \begin_inset space ~
42131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42133 reference "sec:Appendices"
42140 \begin_layout Subsection
42142 \begin_inset space ~
42148 \begin_layout Standard
42151 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42152 default output format for the document (menu
42154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42155 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42156 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42158 \begin_inset space ~
42162 \begin_inset space ~
42168 \begin_inset space ~
42172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42174 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42178 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42181 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42182 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42184 \begin_inset space ~
42187 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42189 \begin_inset space ~
42192 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42194 \begin_inset space ~
42198 \begin_inset space ~
42204 \begin_inset space ~
42208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42210 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42214 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42215 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42217 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42218 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42220 \begin_inset space ~
42223 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42225 \begin_inset space ~
42228 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42232 \begin_inset space ~
42236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42238 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42243 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42244 when it is first configured.
42245 The default output format is
42248 \begin_inset space ~
42256 \begin_layout Subsection
42260 \begin_layout Standard
42263 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42264 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42265 actual document with an external program.
42266 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42267 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42268 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42270 All possible formats are listed in section
42271 \begin_inset space ~
42275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42277 reference "subsec:Export"
42282 You should at least see the menu entry
42287 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42289 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42293 \begin_inset space ~
42297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42299 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42304 \begin_inset Index idx
42307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42318 \begin_layout Standard
42321 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42322 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42324 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42325 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42327 \begin_inset space ~
42330 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42332 \begin_inset space ~
42335 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42339 \begin_inset space ~
42343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42345 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42350 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42351 when it is first configured.
42354 \begin_layout Subsection
42356 \begin_inset space ~
42362 \begin_layout Standard
42365 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42366 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42369 \begin_layout Subsection
42373 \begin_layout Standard
42376 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42377 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42380 \begin_layout Subsection
42381 عرض المستند الرئيسي
42384 \begin_layout Standard
42387 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42403 \begin_inset space ~
42408 manual for more information on this topic).
42409 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42410 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42414 \begin_inset space ~
42418 \begin_inset space ~
42423 generates the output of the whole book, while
42427 will just output the chapter alone.
42430 \begin_layout Standard
42433 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42434 in the document settings (menu
42436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42437 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42438 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42440 \begin_inset space ~
42444 \begin_inset space ~
42450 \begin_inset space ~
42454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42456 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42460 ) or in the preferences (menu
42462 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42463 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42465 \begin_inset space ~
42468 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42470 \begin_inset space ~
42473 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42475 \begin_inset space ~
42479 \begin_inset space ~
42485 \begin_inset space ~
42489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42491 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42498 \begin_layout Subsection
42499 تحديث المستند الرئيسي
42502 \begin_layout Standard
42505 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42521 \begin_inset space ~
42526 manual for more information on this topic).
42527 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42528 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42531 \begin_layout Standard
42534 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42535 in the document settings (menu
42537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42538 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42539 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42541 \begin_inset space ~
42545 \begin_inset space ~
42551 \begin_inset space ~
42555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42557 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42561 ) or in the preferences (menu
42563 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42564 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42566 \begin_inset space ~
42569 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42571 \begin_inset space ~
42574 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42576 \begin_inset space ~
42580 \begin_inset space ~
42586 \begin_inset space ~
42590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42592 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42599 \begin_layout Subsection
42601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42603 name "subsec:Compressed"
42610 \begin_layout Standard
42613 Un/compresses the current document.
42614 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42615 compression (see the
42617 Additional Features
42619 manual for details).
42622 \begin_layout Subsection
42626 \begin_layout Standard
42629 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42632 \begin_layout Subsection
42636 \begin_layout Standard
42639 The document settings are described in appendix
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42646 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42653 \begin_layout Section
42655 \begin_inset Index idx
42658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42667 \begin_layout Subsection
42671 \begin_layout Standard
42672 المدقق الإملائي مشروح في القسم
42673 \begin_inset space ~
42677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42679 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42686 \begin_layout Subsection
42690 \begin_layout Standard
42691 المكنز مشروح في القسم
42692 \begin_inset space ~
42696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42698 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42705 \begin_layout Subsection
42707 \begin_inset Index idx
42710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42717 \begin_inset Index idx
42720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42729 \begin_layout Standard
42732 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42733 the highlighted document part.
42736 \begin_layout Subsection
42738 \begin_inset Index idx
42741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42750 \begin_layout Standard
42753 Generates with the help of the program
42755 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42758 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42759 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42760 This feature is not available on Windows.
42763 \begin_layout Subsection
42765 \begin_inset Index idx
42768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42777 \begin_layout Standard
42780 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42785 \begin_inset space ~
42790 to see the full filename paths.
42793 \begin_layout Subsection
42795 \begin_inset Index idx
42798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42807 \begin_layout Standard
42810 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42811 files as described in section
42812 \begin_inset space ~
42816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42818 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42825 \begin_layout Subsection
42827 \begin_inset Index idx
42830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42831 ليك ! إعادة ضبط|أنظر
42835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42842 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42860 \begin_inset Index idx
42863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42872 \begin_layout Standard
42875 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42876 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42877 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42878 -packages and programs it needs; see
42880 \begin_inset space ~
42884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42886 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42893 \begin_layout Subsection
42897 \begin_layout Standard
42904 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42905 \begin_inset space ~
42909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42911 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42918 \begin_layout Section
42920 \begin_inset Index idx
42923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42932 \begin_layout Standard
42935 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42936 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42938 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42942 \begin_layout Standard
42948 \begin_inset space ~
42953 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42954 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42955 packages and classes found
42956 by \SpecialChar LyX
42958 \begin_inset space ~
42962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42964 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42971 \begin_layout Standard
42977 \begin_inset space ~
42982 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42987 \begin_layout Section
42989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42991 name "sec:Toolbars"
42998 \begin_layout Standard
43001 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43002 \begin_inset space ~
43006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43008 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43015 \begin_layout Standard
43018 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43019 This is described in the
43021 Additional Features
43026 \begin_layout Subsection
43028 \begin_inset Index idx
43031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43040 \begin_layout Standard
43041 \begin_inset Graphics
43042 filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43050 \begin_layout Standard
43051 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43057 \begin_layout Standard
43058 شريط الأدوات الأساسي الذي يظهر في أعلى النافذة يحتوي على مجموعة من الوظائف،
43059 هي من اليمين لليسار:
43063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43075 \begin_inset Note Note
43078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43081 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43086 manual for more information.
43094 \begin_layout Standard
43095 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43101 \begin_layout Standard
43102 \begin_inset Tabular
43103 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43104 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43105 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43106 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43112 \begin_inset Graphics
43113 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43127 قائمة منسدلة بالبيئات التنسيقية المتوفرة في نوع المستند
43140 \begin_layout Standard
43141 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43147 \begin_layout Standard
43149 \begin_inset Tabular
43150 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
43151 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43152 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43153 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43177 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
43184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43207 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
43214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43237 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
43244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43253 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43267 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
43274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43283 arg "spelling-continuously"
43291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43295 المصحح الإملائي المستمر
43301 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43324 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43331 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43354 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43361 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43384 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43414 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43444 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43451 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43460 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43474 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43500 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43514 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43542 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43556 استكشاف\SpecialChar menuseparator
43557 العلامات\SpecialChar menuseparator
43564 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43585 تأكيد النص، دوال التحرير
43587 \SpecialChar menuseparator
43589 \begin_inset space ~
43592 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
43599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43620 تعيين النص كاسم، دوال التحرير
43622 \SpecialChar menuseparator
43624 \begin_inset space ~
43627 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
43634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43643 arg "textstyle-apply"
43651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43655 تهيئة النص حسب إعدادات التحرير الحالية
43657 \SpecialChar menuseparator
43659 \begin_inset space ~
43662 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
43671 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43694 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
43695 رياضيات\SpecialChar menuseparator
43697 \begin_inset space ~
43706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43715 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43729 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
43736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43743 arg "tabular-insert"
43751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43757 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
43764 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43773 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43785 فتح وغلق نافذة الخلاصة،
43787 عرض\SpecialChar menuseparator
43794 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43803 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43815 فتح وغلق شريط الرياضيات
43821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43830 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43842 فتح وغلق شريط الجدول
43855 \begin_layout Subsection
43857 \begin_inset Index idx
43860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43869 \begin_layout Standard
43870 \begin_inset Graphics
43871 filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43879 \begin_layout Standard
43880 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43886 \begin_layout Standard
43887 شريط الأدوات الإضافي الذي يظهر فوق النص مباشرة يحتوي على مجموعة من الوظائف،
43888 هي من اليمين لليسار:
43891 \begin_layout Standard
43892 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43898 \begin_layout Standard
43899 \begin_inset Tabular
43900 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
43901 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43902 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43903 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43940 arg "layout Enumerate"
43948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43958 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43967 arg "layout Itemize"
43975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44012 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44021 arg "layout Description"
44029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44048 arg "depth-increment"
44056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44062 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44064 \begin_inset space ~
44068 \begin_inset space ~
44077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44086 arg "depth-decrement"
44094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44100 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44106 \begin_inset space ~
44115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44124 arg "float-insert figure"
44132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44138 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44139 تعويم\SpecialChar menuseparator
44146 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44155 arg "float-insert table"
44163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44169 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44170 تعويم\SpecialChar menuseparator
44177 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44200 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44207 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44216 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44230 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44237 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44246 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44260 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44267 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44290 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44292 \begin_inset space ~
44301 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44310 arg "nomencl-insert"
44318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44324 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44326 \begin_inset space ~
44335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44344 arg "footnote-insert"
44352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44358 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44365 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44374 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44388 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44390 \begin_inset space ~
44399 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44422 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44423 ملاحظة\SpecialChar menuseparator
44425 \begin_inset space ~
44434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44443 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44457 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44487 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44517 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44519 \begin_inset space ~
44528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44537 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44551 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44552 رياضيات\SpecialChar menuseparator
44559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44568 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44582 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44583 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
44585 \begin_inset space ~
44594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44603 arg "dialog-show character"
44611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44617 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44619 \begin_inset space ~
44622 النص\SpecialChar menuseparator
44629 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44638 arg "layout-paragraph"
44646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44652 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44654 \begin_inset space ~
44663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44672 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44686 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
44700 \begin_layout Subsection
44701 عرض/تحديث شريط الأدوات
44702 \begin_inset Index idx
44705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44706 شريط أدوات ! عرض / تحديث
44714 \begin_layout Standard
44715 \begin_inset Graphics
44716 filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44723 \begin_layout Standard
44726 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44732 \begin_layout Standard
44735 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44739 \begin_layout Standard
44742 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44748 \begin_layout Standard
44749 \begin_inset Tabular
44750 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44751 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44752 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44753 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44785 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44794 arg "buffer-update"
44802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44825 arg "master-buffer-view"
44833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44840 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44842 \begin_inset space ~
44851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44860 arg "master-buffer-update"
44868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44875 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44877 \begin_inset space ~
44881 \begin_inset space ~
44890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44899 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44915 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44916 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44917 Synchronize with Output
44923 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44947 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44948 View (Other Formats)
44954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44961 arg "update-others"
44969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44977 Update (Other Formats)
44990 \begin_layout Standard
44993 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44997 \begin_layout Subsection
44998 أشرطة الأدوات الأخرى
45001 \begin_layout Standard
45004 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45005 \begin_inset space ~
45009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45011 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45015 , the table toolbar
45018 \begin_inset Index idx
45021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45032 \begin_inset space ~
45037 manual and the math macro toolbar
45040 \begin_inset Index idx
45043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45058 \begin_layout Chapter
45060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45062 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45067 \begin_inset Index idx
45070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45079 \begin_layout Standard
45085 \begin_inset space ~
45090 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45091 is called with the menu
45093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45097 You can save your document settings as default with the
45099 Save as Document Defaults
45101 button in any dialog.
45102 This will create a template named
45106 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45107 when you create a new document without
45111 \begin_layout Standard
45118 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45119 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45122 \begin_layout Standard
45125 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45126 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45127 to find the one you are looking for.
45128 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45129 the submenus of the dialog.
45131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45135 \begin_inset space \space{}
45139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45146 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45147 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45148 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45151 \begin_layout Section
45155 \begin_layout Standard
45158 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45160 Document classes are described in section
45161 \begin_inset space ~
45165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45167 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45175 \begin_layout Standard
45181 \begin_inset space ~
45186 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45191 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45192 as a layout for a document class.
45193 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45195 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45204 \begin_layout Standard
45207 Some classes use special class options by default.
45208 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45212 and you can decide to use them or not.
45213 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45214 recommended you leave them untouched.
45219 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45220 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45225 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45227 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45235 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45236 \begin_inset Newline newline
45241 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45244 \begin_inset Newline newline
45247 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45248 distribution, see section
45253 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45255 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45268 \begin_layout Standard
45275 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45276 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45277 in the background if the child document
45278 is opened without its master.
45279 This way child documents are always compilable.
45280 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45287 \begin_inset space ~
45295 \begin_layout Standard
45298 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45311 \begin_inset Index idx
45314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45315 حزمة لتيك ! prettyref
45321 \begin_inset Index idx
45324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45325 حزمة لتيك ! refstyle
45332 for cross-references, see section
45335 \begin_inset space ~
45339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45341 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45348 \begin_layout Section
45352 \begin_layout Standard
45355 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45356 Please refer to the section
45359 \begin_inset space ~
45367 \begin_inset space ~
45372 manual for details.
45375 \begin_layout Section
45379 \begin_layout Standard
45382 Modules are explained in section
45383 \begin_inset space ~
45387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45389 reference "subsec:Modules"
45396 \begin_layout Section
45400 \begin_layout Standard
45404 \begin_inset space ~
45408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45410 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45417 \begin_layout Section
45421 \begin_layout Standard
45424 The document font settings are described in section
45425 \begin_inset space ~
45429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45431 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45438 \begin_layout Section
45442 \begin_layout Standard
45445 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45457 \begin_inset space ~
45462 and whether it should be a
45465 \begin_inset space ~
45470 can also be specified here.
45473 \begin_layout Standard
45476 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45477 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45478 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45480 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45483 \begin_layout Standard
45488 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45491 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45492 justifies the text on screen.
45493 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45497 \begin_layout Section
45501 \begin_layout Standard
45504 This dialog is described in sections
45505 \begin_inset space ~
45509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45511 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45518 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45525 \begin_layout Section
45529 \begin_layout Standard
45532 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45533 \begin_inset space ~
45537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45539 reference "subsec:Margins"
45546 \begin_layout Section
45548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45550 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45555 \begin_inset Index idx
45558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45567 \begin_layout Standard
45570 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45571 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45572 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45574 is always encoded in utf8).
45575 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45576 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45577 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45578 -command is not known for
45579 a particular character).
45582 \begin_layout Standard
45585 If you use the option
45590 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45591 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
45592 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45594 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45595 exactly one encoding.
45596 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45599 \begin_layout Standard
45603 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45604 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45605 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45606 installation supports Unicode), choose
45607 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45608 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45609 is quite incomplete, so
45610 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45615 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45616 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45617 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45618 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45619 -commands is not used, because all
45620 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45621 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45622 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45623 , two new alternative engines
45624 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45626 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45628 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45631 \begin_inset space ~
45639 \begin_inset space ~
45647 \begin_inset space ~
45653 \begin_inset space ~
45657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45659 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45664 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45668 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45671 \begin_layout Standard
45677 \begin_inset space ~
45682 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45683 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45693 The possible settings are:
45696 \begin_layout Description
45699 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45701 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45702 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45706 \begin_inset space ~
45710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45712 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45719 \begin_layout Description
45722 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45723 format you will use.
45724 In many cases this will be
45731 \begin_inset Index idx
45734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45743 If the newer package
45750 \begin_inset Index idx
45753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45754 حزمة لتيك ! polyglossia
45761 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45762 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45763 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45765 package will be used instead of
45772 \begin_layout Description
45776 \begin_inset space ~
45787 would be more appropriate.
45790 \begin_layout Description
45793 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45794 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45798 (for German texts), type in
45801 \begin_inset Newline newline
45806 usepackage{ngerman}
45809 \begin_layout Description
45812 None will not use a language package.
45813 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45816 \begin_layout Standard
45819 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45822 \begin_layout Description
45826 \begin_inset space ~
45830 \begin_inset space ~
45834 \begin_inset space ~
45841 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45849 \begin_inset Index idx
45852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45853 حزمة لتيك ! inputenc
45861 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45862 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45863 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45867 \begin_layout Description
45870 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45872 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45873 commands, which may result in a big
45874 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45875 -commands are needed.
45878 \begin_layout Description
45882 \begin_inset space ~
45886 \begin_inset space ~
45889 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45892 \begin_layout Description
45896 \begin_inset space ~
45900 \begin_inset space ~
45903 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45906 \begin_layout Description
45910 \begin_inset space ~
45913 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45916 \begin_layout Description
45920 \begin_inset space ~
45924 \begin_inset space ~
45927 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45928 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45931 \begin_layout Description
45935 \begin_inset space ~
45939 \begin_inset space ~
45942 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45946 \begin_layout Description
45950 \begin_inset space ~
45954 \begin_inset space ~
45957 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45958 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45961 \begin_layout Description
45965 \begin_inset space ~
45969 \begin_inset space ~
45973 \begin_inset space ~
45976 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45977 \begin_inset space ~
45983 \begin_layout Description
45987 \begin_inset space ~
45991 \begin_inset space ~
45995 \begin_inset space ~
45998 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45999 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46002 \begin_layout Description
46006 \begin_inset space ~
46010 \begin_inset space ~
46013 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46014 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46015 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46016 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46017 \begin_inset space ~
46021 \begin_inset space ~
46027 \begin_layout Description
46031 \begin_inset space ~
46035 \begin_inset space ~
46038 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46039 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46040 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46042 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46043 \begin_inset space ~
46047 \begin_inset space ~
46053 \begin_layout Description
46057 \begin_inset space ~
46061 \begin_inset space ~
46064 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46067 \begin_layout Description
46071 \begin_inset space ~
46075 \begin_inset space ~
46078 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46081 \begin_layout Description
46085 \begin_inset space ~
46089 \begin_inset space ~
46092 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46095 \begin_layout Description
46099 \begin_inset space ~
46102 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46105 \begin_layout Description
46109 \begin_inset space ~
46112 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46115 \begin_layout Description
46119 \begin_inset space ~
46123 \begin_inset space ~
46126 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46129 \begin_layout Description
46133 \begin_inset space ~
46137 \begin_inset space ~
46143 \begin_layout Description
46147 \begin_inset space ~
46151 \begin_inset space ~
46154 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46157 \begin_layout Description
46161 \begin_inset space ~
46165 \begin_inset space ~
46171 \begin_layout Description
46175 \begin_inset space ~
46179 \begin_inset space ~
46182 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46190 \begin_inset Index idx
46193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46201 when using this, set the document language to
46206 \begin_layout Description
46210 \begin_inset space ~
46214 \begin_inset space ~
46217 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46222 , when using this, set the document language to
46225 \begin_inset space ~
46231 \begin_layout Description
46235 \begin_inset space ~
46239 \begin_inset space ~
46242 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46250 \begin_inset Index idx
46253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46254 حزمة لتيك ! japanese
46261 when using this, set the document language to
46266 \begin_layout Description
46270 \begin_inset space ~
46274 \begin_inset space ~
46277 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46282 , when using this, set the document language to
46287 \begin_layout Description
46291 \begin_inset space ~
46295 \begin_inset space ~
46298 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46303 , when using this, set the document language to
46308 \begin_layout Description
46312 \begin_inset space ~
46315 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46318 \begin_layout Description
46322 \begin_inset space ~
46326 \begin_inset space ~
46330 \begin_inset space ~
46333 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46336 \begin_layout Description
46340 \begin_inset space ~
46344 \begin_inset space ~
46348 \begin_inset space ~
46351 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46352 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46353 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46356 \begin_layout Description
46360 \begin_inset space ~
46364 \begin_inset space ~
46370 \begin_layout Description
46374 \begin_inset space ~
46378 \begin_inset space ~
46381 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46382 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46385 \begin_layout Description
46389 \begin_inset space ~
46393 \begin_inset space ~
46396 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46404 \begin_inset Index idx
46407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46415 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46418 \begin_layout Description
46422 \begin_inset space ~
46430 \begin_inset space ~
46433 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46440 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46443 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46450 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46451 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46453 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46456 \begin_layout Description
46460 \begin_inset space ~
46464 \begin_inset space ~
46467 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46475 \begin_inset Index idx
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46486 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46489 \begin_layout Description
46493 \begin_inset space ~
46496 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46504 \begin_inset Index idx
46507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46508 حزمة لتيك ! inputenc
46516 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46520 \begin_layout Description
46524 \begin_inset space ~
46528 \begin_inset space ~
46532 \begin_inset space ~
46535 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46536 \begin_inset space ~
46542 \begin_layout Description
46546 \begin_inset space ~
46550 \begin_inset space ~
46554 \begin_inset space ~
46557 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46558 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46559 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46563 \begin_layout Description
46567 \begin_inset space ~
46571 \begin_inset space ~
46575 \begin_inset space ~
46578 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46579 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46582 \begin_layout Section
46584 \begin_inset Index idx
46587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46594 \begin_inset Index idx
46597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46604 \begin_inset Index idx
46607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46614 \begin_inset Index idx
46617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46626 \begin_layout Standard
46629 Here you can alter the font color for the
46633 (default: black), for
46636 \begin_inset space ~
46641 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46645 (default: white) and for
46648 \begin_inset space ~
46658 sets the color back to the default.
46661 \begin_layout Standard
46664 Clicking any button showing
46672 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46673 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46674 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46675 later more quickly.
46678 \begin_layout Standard
46681 Note, if you change the
46684 \begin_inset space ~
46689 font color and use the option
46692 \begin_inset space ~
46697 in the document settings under
46700 \begin_inset space ~
46705 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46706 \begin_inset space ~
46710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46712 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46719 \begin_layout Standard
46722 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46728 \begin_layout Standard
46734 \begin_inset space ~
46743 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46746 \begin_inset space ~
46749 Code after a forced page break:
46752 \begin_layout Itemize
46755 For the page color:
46756 \begin_inset Newline newline
46763 pagecolor{color name}
46766 \begin_layout Itemize
46769 For the text color:
46770 \begin_inset Newline newline
46780 \begin_layout Standard
46783 You are restricted to one of
46819 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46826 \begin_inset space ~
46832 \begin_inset Newline newline
46835 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46836 names to refer to them:
46839 \begin_layout Itemize
46847 \begin_inset Newline newline
46852 page_backgroundcolor
46855 \begin_layout Itemize
46861 \begin_inset space ~
46867 \begin_inset Newline newline
46875 \begin_layout Itemize
46881 \begin_inset space ~
46887 \begin_inset Newline newline
46895 \begin_layout Itemize
46901 \begin_inset space ~
46907 \begin_inset Newline newline
46915 \begin_layout Standard
46918 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46921 \begin_inset space ~
46929 \begin_inset space ~
46937 \begin_layout Section
46938 الترقيم & جدول المحتويات
46941 \begin_layout Standard
46944 Here you can adjust the
46948 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46952 as described in section
46953 \begin_inset space ~
46957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46959 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46966 \begin_layout Section
46970 \begin_layout Standard
46973 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46981 \begin_inset Index idx
46984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46985 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
46995 \begin_inset Index idx
46998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47013 \begin_inset Index idx
47016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47017 حزمة لتيك ! jurabib
47025 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47028 Sectioned bibliography
47030 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47038 \begin_inset Index idx
47041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47042 حزمة لتيك ! bibtopic
47054 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47055 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47059 for the generation of the bibliography.
47060 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47061 \begin_inset space ~
47065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47067 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47074 \begin_layout Section
47078 \begin_layout Standard
47081 Here you can define the
47085 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47087 \begin_inset space ~
47091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47093 reference "sec:Index"
47100 \begin_layout Section
47104 \begin_layout Standard
47107 The PDF properties are explained in section
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47116 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47123 \begin_layout Section
47127 \begin_layout Standard
47130 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47131 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47139 \begin_inset Index idx
47142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47143 حزمة لتيك ! amsmath
47153 \begin_inset Index idx
47156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47157 حزمة لتيك ! amssymb
47167 \begin_inset Index idx
47170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47181 \begin_inset Index idx
47184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47195 \begin_inset Index idx
47198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47199 حزمة لتيك ! mathdots
47209 \begin_inset Index idx
47212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47213 حزمة لتيك ! mathtools
47223 \begin_inset Index idx
47226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47237 \begin_inset Index idx
47240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47241 حزمة لتيك ! stackrel
47251 \begin_inset Index idx
47254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47255 حزمة لتيك ! stmaryrd
47265 \begin_inset Index idx
47268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47269 حزمة لتيك ! undertilde
47276 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47279 \begin_layout Description
47282 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47283 -errors in formulas,
47284 ensure that you have this enabled.
47287 \begin_layout Description
47290 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47291 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47292 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47296 \begin_layout Description
47299 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47302 \begin_inset space ~
47314 \begin_layout Description
47317 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47320 \begin_inset space ~
47332 \begin_layout Description
47335 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47346 \begin_layout Description
47349 mathtools is used for the math commands
47385 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47392 \begin_layout Description
47395 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47397 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47406 \begin_layout Description
47409 stackrel is used for the math command
47426 \begin_layout Description
47429 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47432 \begin_layout Description
47435 undertilde is used for the math command
47443 Accents for one Character
47452 \begin_layout Section
47456 \begin_layout Standard
47459 The float placement options are described in the section
47462 \begin_inset space ~
47470 \begin_inset space ~
47478 \begin_layout Section
47482 \begin_layout Standard
47485 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47487 Program Code Listings
47492 \begin_inset space ~
47500 \begin_layout Section
47504 \begin_layout Standard
47507 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47515 set to be used and set the
47520 The itemize environment is described in section
47521 \begin_inset space ~
47525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47527 reference "sec:Itemize"
47534 \begin_layout Standard
47537 You can furthermore specify a
47540 \begin_inset space ~
47545 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47546 command of the desired character.
47547 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47554 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47560 \begin_inset space \space{}
47564 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47574 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47575 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47578 \begin_layout Standard
47581 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47590 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47591 -packages in the preamble (menu
47594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47595 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47598 \begin_inset space ~
47604 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47608 usepackage{textcomp}
47611 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47615 usepackage{amssymb}
47625 \begin_layout Section
47629 \begin_layout Standard
47632 Branches are described in section
47633 \begin_inset space ~
47637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47639 reference "sec:Branches"
47646 \begin_layout Section
47648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47650 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47657 \begin_layout Standard
47660 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47663 \begin_layout Description
47667 \begin_inset space ~
47671 \begin_inset space ~
47674 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47694 View Master Document
47695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47702 Update Master Document
47703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47710 menu or the toolbar.
47711 The default is set in
47713 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47714 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47716 \begin_inset space ~
47719 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47723 \begin_inset space ~
47727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47729 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47736 \begin_layout Description
47740 \begin_inset space ~
47744 \begin_inset space ~
47747 Output settings for the menu
47749 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47751 \begin_inset space ~
47757 For a detailed description see section
47759 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47764 \begin_inset space ~
47772 \begin_layout Description
47776 \begin_inset space ~
47780 \begin_inset space ~
47783 Options offers settings for the export format
47791 \begin_inset space ~
47796 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47797 \begin_inset space ~
47800 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47804 \begin_inset space ~
47809 settings are described in detail in section
47811 Math Output in XHTML
47816 \begin_inset space ~
47825 \begin_inset space ~
47829 \begin_inset space ~
47834 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47837 \begin_layout Description
47841 \begin_inset space ~
47846 Save transient properties
47848 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47849 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47850 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47854 \begin_layout Itemize
47857 the activation of change tracking
47860 \begin_layout Itemize
47863 the output of tracked changes
47866 \begin_layout Itemize
47869 the recording of the document directory path.
47872 \begin_layout Standard
47875 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47876 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47880 \begin_layout Section
47884 \begin_layout Standard
47887 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47889 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47891 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47893 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47897 \begin_layout Standard
47900 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47901 -syntax is given in section
47902 \begin_inset space ~
47906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47908 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47915 \begin_layout Chapter
47917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47919 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47924 \begin_inset Index idx
47927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47936 \begin_layout Standard
47939 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47941 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47945 It has the following submenus.
47948 \begin_layout Section
47952 \begin_layout Subsection
47956 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47958 \begin_inset Index idx
47961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47962 تخصيص ! أشرطة الأدوات
47968 \begin_inset Index idx
47971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47972 تخصيص ! قائمة رئيسية
47980 \begin_layout Standard
47983 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47984 interface (ui) file.
47985 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47993 \begin_layout Description
48000 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48003 \begin_layout Description
48012 the menu entries in popup context menus
48015 \begin_layout Description
48022 specifies the toolbar buttons
48025 \begin_layout Standard
48028 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48029 and edit the entries.
48032 \begin_layout Standard
48035 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48047 entries must be finished with an explicit
48072 and in the case of the
48073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48085 The syntax for the entries is:
48088 \begin_layout Standard
48091 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48120 \begin_layout Standard
48124 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48127 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48128 -functions are listed in the menu
48130 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48132 \begin_inset space ~
48140 \begin_layout Standard
48143 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48149 \begin_layout Standard
48152 For example, assuming you use the menu
48154 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48157 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48161 \begin_layout Standard
48164 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48188 \begin_layout Standard
48192 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48207 to have the sixth bookmark.
48210 \begin_layout Standard
48215 \begin_inset space ~
48220 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48221 's toolbar buttons.
48222 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48223 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48226 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48234 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48238 \begin_layout Standard
48243 Enable tool tips in main work area
48245 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48249 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48253 \begin_layout Standard
48259 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48260 should display in the menu
48262 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48264 \begin_inset space ~
48272 \begin_layout Subsection
48276 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48280 \begin_layout Standard
48285 Restore window layouts and geometries
48288 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48289 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48293 \begin_layout Standard
48298 Restore cursor positions
48300 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48304 \begin_layout Standard
48309 Load opened files from last session
48311 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48315 \begin_layout Standard
48320 Clear all session information
48322 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48323 sessions (cursor positions, names
48324 of last opened documents, etc.).
48327 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48328 النسخ الاحتياطي & الحفظ
48329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48331 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48336 \begin_inset Index idx
48339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48340 نسخ احتياطي ! مستندات
48348 \begin_layout Standard
48352 Backup original documents when saving
48354 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48355 it was saved the last time.
48356 It is stored in the
48359 \begin_inset space ~
48365 \begin_inset space ~
48369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48371 reference "sec:Paths"
48375 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48378 \begin_inset space ~
48384 The backup file has the file extension
48385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48399 \begin_layout Standard
48404 Backup documents, every
48406 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48409 \begin_layout Standard
48413 Save documents compressed by default
48415 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48416 \begin_inset space ~
48420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48422 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48427 This applies to newly created documents only.
48428 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48432 النافذة & مساحة العمل
48435 \begin_layout Standard
48440 Open documents in tabs
48442 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48446 \begin_layout Standard
48453 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48462 \begin_inset space ~
48466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48468 reference "sec:Paths"
48472 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48479 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48480 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48481 of \SpecialChar LyX
48483 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48484 instance is created for each file.
48487 \begin_layout Standard
48492 Single close-tab button
48494 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48506 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48507 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48508 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48512 \begin_layout Standard
48515 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48524 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48525 before the change takes effect.
48533 \begin_layout Standard
48540 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48542 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48544 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48548 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48549 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48550 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48553 \begin_layout Subsection
48555 \begin_inset Index idx
48558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48567 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48574 \begin_layout Standard
48577 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48581 \begin_layout Standard
48584 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48593 This section only deals with the fonts
48597 the \SpecialChar LyX
48599 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48602 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48603 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48614 \begin_layout Standard
48617 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48634 (depends on the system) as its
48637 \begin_inset space ~
48653 \begin_layout Standard
48656 You can change the font size with the
48663 \begin_layout Standard
48670 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48675 points have the size of 1
48676 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48680 \begin_inset space ~
48684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48686 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48691 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48696 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48697 \begin_inset space ~
48701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48703 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48710 \begin_layout Subsection
48712 \begin_inset Index idx
48715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48722 \begin_inset Index idx
48725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48734 \begin_layout Standard
48737 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48738 by choosing an item in the
48739 list and selecting the
48746 \begin_layout Standard
48749 By checking the option
48753 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48756 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48757 \begin_inset space ~
48761 \begin_inset space ~
48766 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48769 \begin_layout Subsection
48771 \begin_inset Index idx
48774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48783 \begin_layout Standard
48786 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48790 \begin_layout Standard
48796 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48797 This feature is described in section
48798 \begin_inset space ~
48802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48804 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48811 \begin_layout Standard
48814 Checking the option
48817 \begin_inset space ~
48821 \begin_inset space ~
48825 \begin_inset space ~
48830 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48833 \begin_layout Section
48835 \begin_inset Index idx
48838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48847 \begin_layout Subsection
48851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48855 \begin_layout Standard
48860 Cursor follows scrollbar
48862 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48866 \begin_layout Standard
48869 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48870 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48871 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48874 \begin_layout Standard
48878 Scroll below end of document
48880 is self-explanatory.
48883 \begin_layout Standard
48886 In \SpecialChar LyX
48887 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48894 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48896 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48897 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48900 \begin_layout Standard
48905 Sort environments alphabetically
48907 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48910 \begin_layout Standard
48915 Group environments by their category
48917 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48920 \begin_layout Standard
48927 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48938 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48942 \begin_layout Standard
48945 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48950 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48951 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48955 \begin_layout Subsection
48957 \begin_inset Index idx
48960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48967 \begin_inset Index idx
48970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48979 \begin_layout Standard
48985 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48987 Several binding files are available, among them:
48990 \begin_layout Description
48993 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48996 \begin_layout Description
48999 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49011 \begin_layout Description
49014 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49025 \begin_layout Standard
49028 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49033 , and binding files for special languages.
49034 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49039 \begin_inset space \space{}
49043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49051 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49052 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49053 will try to use the appropriate binding
49057 \begin_layout Standard
49060 Some binding files, like
49064 , only have a limited scope.
49065 When looking at the end of the file
49069 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49072 \begin_layout Standard
49078 \begin_inset space ~
49082 \begin_inset space ~
49087 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49088 in the selected key binding file.
49091 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49095 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49100 \begin_inset Index idx
49103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49104 مفتاح الربط ! تحرير
49112 \begin_layout Standard
49115 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49116 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49117 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49118 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49121 Show key-bindings containing
49124 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49125 Insert there for example as keyword
49126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49133 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49134 functions that contain
49135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49143 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49144 All \SpecialChar LyX
49145 functions are also listed in the file
49150 that you will find in the
49157 \begin_layout Standard
49160 For example, to add the shortcut
49168 , select the function and press the
49173 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49174 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49177 \begin_layout Standard
49180 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49181 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49183 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49184 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49186 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49191 \begin_layout Standard
49194 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49197 \begin_layout Standard
49200 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49202 The syntax of the entries is:
49205 \begin_layout Standard
49212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49231 \begin_layout Standard
49234 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49235 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49263 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49264 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49265 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49266 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49268 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49272 , you needed to specify it as
49277 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49280 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49283 \begin_layout Subsection
49284 لوحة المفاتيح/الفارة
49285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49287 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49292 \begin_inset Index idx
49295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49296 خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
49302 \begin_inset Index idx
49305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49306 إعدادات ! خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
49314 \begin_layout Standard
49317 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49318 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49319 provides keyboard maps.
49320 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49321 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49324 \begin_inset space ~
49328 \begin_inset space ~
49333 and select the keyboard map file named
49340 \begin_layout Standard
49351 keyboard map and, if you use the
49355 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49360 arg "keymap-primary"
49370 arg "keymap-secondary"
49375 respectively or toggle between them with
49380 arg "keymap-toggle"
49388 \begin_layout Standard
49391 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49400 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49409 \begin_layout Standard
49412 You can also specify the mouse
49414 Wheel scrolling speed
49417 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49421 Middle mouse button pasting
49423 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49424 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49427 \begin_layout Standard
49437 \begin_inset space ~
49441 \begin_inset space ~
49446 you can select a key for zooming.
49447 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49450 \begin_layout Subsection
49451 الإكمال التلقائي للمدخلات
49454 \begin_layout Standard
49457 Input completion is described in section
49458 \begin_inset space ~
49462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49464 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49471 \begin_layout Section
49473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49480 \begin_inset Index idx
49483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49490 \begin_inset Index idx
49493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49502 \begin_layout Standard
49505 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49506 are normally determined during
49508 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49511 \begin_layout Description
49515 \begin_inset space ~
49518 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49519 's working directory.
49520 It is the default when you
49531 \begin_inset space ~
49539 \begin_layout Description
49543 \begin_inset space ~
49546 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
49548 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49550 \begin_inset space ~
49554 \begin_inset space ~
49562 \begin_layout Description
49566 \begin_inset space ~
49569 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
49575 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49579 \begin_inset Newline newline
49583 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49596 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49597 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49605 \begin_layout Description
49609 \begin_inset space ~
49615 \begin_inset Index idx
49618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49626 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49627 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49628 \begin_inset space ~
49632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49634 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49642 will be used to save the backups.
49643 \begin_inset Newline newline
49646 Backup files have the ending
49647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49657 \begin_layout Description
49661 \begin_inset space ~
49664 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49665 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49667 \begin_inset Newline newline
49674 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49680 You can edit this file with the program
49689 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49690 in its preferences under
49693 \begin_inset space ~
49699 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49704 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49706 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49707 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49713 and \SpecialChar LyX
49714 need to be running the same time.
49715 \begin_inset Newline newline
49718 The pipe is also used for the
49722 feature, see section
49723 \begin_inset space ~
49727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49729 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49734 \begin_inset Newline newline
49737 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49738 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49739 \begin_inset Newline newline
49755 \begin_layout Description
49759 \begin_inset space ~
49762 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49765 \begin_layout Description
49769 \begin_inset space ~
49772 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49773 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49774 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49777 \begin_layout Description
49781 \begin_inset space ~
49784 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49790 You only need to specify it if you are using
49794 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49796 For \SpecialChar LyX
49801 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49805 \begin_layout Description
49809 \begin_inset space ~
49812 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49813 When \SpecialChar LyX
49814 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49815 to find it on the system.
49816 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49818 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49827 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49828 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49831 \begin_layout Description
49835 \begin_inset space ~
49838 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49839 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49840 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49841 code or in the document
49843 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49845 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49846 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49847 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49848 scanned for the input files.
49849 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49850 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49852 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49853 compilation may fail for some documents.
49856 \begin_layout Section
49860 \begin_layout Standard
49863 Here you can insert your
49872 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49874 \begin_inset space ~
49878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49880 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49884 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49887 \begin_layout Section
49889 \begin_inset Index idx
49892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49899 \begin_inset Index idx
49902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49911 \begin_layout Subsection
49913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49915 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49922 \begin_layout Description
49926 \begin_inset space ~
49930 \begin_inset space ~
49933 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49935 You can find its actual translation status here:
49936 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49938 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49946 \begin_layout Description
49950 \begin_inset space ~
49953 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49954 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49955 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49956 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49973 The most widespread language package is
49980 \begin_inset Index idx
49983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49991 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49993 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49994 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49995 come with the alternative
50003 \begin_inset Index idx
50006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50007 حزمة لتيك ! polyglossia
50014 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50015 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50021 The available selections are described in section
50022 \begin_inset space ~
50026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50028 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50035 \begin_layout Description
50039 \begin_inset space ~
50042 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50043 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50044 you can here specify the command to start the package.
50045 An example is the start command
50051 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50053 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50057 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50073 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50078 \begin_layout Description
50082 \begin_inset space ~
50090 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50091 command toggles the package on and off.
50094 \begin_layout Description
50098 \begin_inset space ~
50102 \begin_inset space ~
50105 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50109 \begin_layout Description
50113 \begin_inset space ~
50117 \begin_inset space ~
50120 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50124 \begin_layout Description
50128 \begin_inset space ~
50132 \begin_inset space ~
50135 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
50136 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
50137 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50139 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50146 \begin_layout Description
50150 \begin_inset space ~
50153 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
50155 When this option is not set, the
50158 \begin_inset space ~
50163 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50165 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50168 \begin_inset space ~
50176 \begin_layout Description
50180 \begin_inset space ~
50186 \begin_inset space ~
50192 When it is not set, the
50195 \begin_inset space ~
50200 is set to the end of the document.
50203 \begin_layout Description
50207 \begin_inset space ~
50211 \begin_inset space ~
50214 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
50215 language will be underlined in blue.
50218 \begin_layout Description
50222 \begin_inset space ~
50226 \begin_inset space ~
50229 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50230 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50233 \begin_layout Description
50237 \begin_inset space ~
50240 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
50241 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50242 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
50243 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50246 \begin_layout Subsection
50250 \begin_layout Standard
50251 إعدادات المدقق الإملائي مشروحة في القسم
50252 \begin_inset space ~
50256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50258 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50265 \begin_layout Section
50269 \begin_layout Subsection
50271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50273 name "subsec:General-output"
50280 \begin_layout Description
50284 \begin_inset space ~
50287 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50289 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50291 \begin_inset space ~
50297 For a detailed description see section
50299 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50304 \begin_inset space ~
50312 \begin_layout Description
50316 \begin_inset space ~
50319 Options Options for the program
50323 that is used for the export format
50328 \begin_inset space ~
50332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50334 reference "subsec:Export"
50339 Possible options are listed in the
50344 \begin_inset Newline newline
50348 \begin_inset Flex URL
50351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50353 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50363 \begin_layout Description
50367 \begin_inset space ~
50371 \begin_inset space ~
50374 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50377 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50378 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50380 \begin_inset space ~
50386 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50389 \begin_layout Description
50393 \begin_inset space ~
50399 \begin_inset Index idx
50402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50409 \begin_inset Index idx
50412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50413 إعدادات ! هيئة التاريخ
50420 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50421 \begin_inset Newline newline
50425 \begin_inset Flex URL
50428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50430 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50436 \begin_inset Newline newline
50444 \begin_inset Newline newline
50448 \begin_inset Newline newline
50453 طباعة التاريخ بالشكل يوم/شهر/عام
50456 \begin_layout Description
50460 \begin_inset space ~
50464 \begin_inset space ~
50467 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50468 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50471 \begin_layout Subsection
50473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50475 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50480 \begin_inset Index idx
50483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50492 \begin_layout Description
50496 \begin_inset space ~
50504 \begin_inset space ~
50508 \begin_inset space ~
50511 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
50516 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
50537 are used for Cyrillic.
50538 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
50539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50551 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
50553 sets up in the background.
50554 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
50557 \begin_layout Description
50561 \begin_inset space ~
50565 \begin_inset space ~
50569 \begin_inset space ~
50573 \begin_inset space ~
50576 options They only have an effect when the program
50580 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
50583 \begin_layout Standard
50586 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
50587 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
50588 manuals of the applications.
50591 \begin_layout Description
50593 \begin_inset space ~
50597 \begin_inset space ~
50600 المراجع إعدادات إنتاج ثبت المراجع، انظر قسم
50601 \begin_inset space ~
50605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50607 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50614 \begin_layout Description
50616 \begin_inset space ~
50619 الفهرس إعدادات إنتاج الفهرس، انظر القسم
50620 \begin_inset space ~
50624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50626 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
50633 \begin_layout Description
50635 \begin_inset space ~
50639 \begin_inset space ~
50642 المصطلحات إعدادات إنتاج قائمة المصطلحات، انظر القسم
50643 \begin_inset space ~
50647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50649 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
50656 \begin_layout Description
50664 \begin_inset space ~
50667 command Command for the program
50669 Check\SpecialChar TeX
50672 that is described in the section
50674 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
50679 Additional Features
50684 \begin_layout Standard
50687 There are additionally the following options:
50690 \begin_layout Description
50694 \begin_inset space ~
50698 \begin_inset space ~
50702 \begin_inset space ~
50706 \begin_inset space ~
50711 \begin_inset space ~
50714 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
50715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50732 to separate folders.
50733 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
50737 \begin_inset Index idx
50740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50747 \begin_inset Index idx
50750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50759 \begin_layout Description
50763 \begin_inset space ~
50767 \begin_inset space ~
50771 \begin_inset space ~
50775 \begin_inset space ~
50779 \begin_inset space ~
50783 \begin_inset space ~
50786 changes Removes all manually set
50792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50793 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50795 \begin_inset space ~
50800 dialog when changing the document class.
50803 \begin_layout Section
50805 \begin_inset Index idx
50808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50817 \begin_layout Subsection
50819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50821 name "subsec:Converters"
50826 \begin_inset Index idx
50829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50838 \begin_layout Standard
50841 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
50842 from one format to another.
50843 You can modify converters or create new ones.
50844 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
50851 \begin_inset space ~
50856 field and press the
50861 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
50865 \begin_inset space ~
50870 drop-down list, modify the
50874 field and press the
50881 \begin_layout Standard
50886 Converter File Cache
50892 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
50894 Maximum Age (in days
50897 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
50898 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
50901 \begin_layout Standard
50904 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
50905 definition, is described in the section
50916 \begin_layout Subsection
50918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50920 name "sec:File-Formats"
50925 \begin_inset Index idx
50928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50935 \begin_inset Index idx
50938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50947 \begin_layout Standard
50950 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
50960 programs that should be used for certain formats.
50963 \begin_layout Standard
50966 You can also define the
50968 Default output format
50970 that is used when you use
50972 View, Update, View Master Document
50976 Update Master Document
50982 menu or the toolbar.
50985 \begin_layout Standard
50988 More about formats and their options is described in the section
50999 \begin_layout Standard
51002 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51004 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51005 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51006 This is done by specifying a
51011 More about this is described in the section
51022 \begin_layout Chapter
51023 الوحدات المتاحة في \SpecialChar LyX
51025 \begin_inset Index idx
51028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51037 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51044 \begin_layout Standard
51046 \begin_inset space ~
51050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51052 reference "tab:Units"
51056 يشرح كل الوحدات المتاحة في \SpecialChar LyX
51057 وتستخدم في هذا المستند.
51060 \begin_layout Standard
51061 \begin_inset Float table
51067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51068 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51090 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51098 \begin_inset Tabular
51099 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51100 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51101 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51102 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51103 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51255 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
51259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51291 عرض حرف M في الخط الحالي
51296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51320 ارتفاع حرف X في الخط الحالي
51325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51518 scaled point (65536
51519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51586 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
51591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51710 % من العرض الأصلي للصورة
51715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51719 \begin_inset space ~
51729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51802 \begin_layout Standard
51805 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51811 \begin_layout Standard
51812 ثبت المراجع التالي تم إنشاءه باستخدام بيئة ثبت المراجع.
51815 \begin_layout Bibliography
51816 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51817 LatexCommand bibitem
51824 فريق \SpecialChar LyX
51826 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51829 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
51835 \begin_inset Newline newline
51839 \begin_inset Flex URL
51842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51844 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
51852 \begin_layout Bibliography
51853 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51854 LatexCommand bibitem
51855 key "latexcompanion"
51862 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
51864 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51865 Companion Second Edition.
51868 Addison-Wesley, 2004
51871 \begin_layout Bibliography
51872 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51873 LatexCommand bibitem
51881 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
51884 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
51888 Addison-Wesley, 2003
51891 \begin_layout Bibliography
51892 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51893 LatexCommand bibitem
51904 : A Document Preparation System.
51907 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
51910 \begin_layout Bibliography
51911 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51912 LatexCommand bibitem
51924 The \SpecialChar TeX
51928 Addison-Wesley, 1984
51931 \begin_layout Bibliography
51932 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51933 LatexCommand bibitem
51939 أصناف \SpecialChar TeX
51941 \begin_inset Newline newline
51945 \begin_inset Flex URL
51948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51950 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
51958 \begin_layout Bibliography
51959 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51960 LatexCommand bibitem
51966 أسئلة شائعة عن \SpecialChar LaTeX
51968 \begin_inset Newline newline
51972 \begin_inset Flex URL
51975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51977 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
51985 \begin_layout Bibliography
51986 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51987 LatexCommand bibitem
51994 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51997 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52004 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52008 \begin_inset Newline newline
52012 \begin_inset Flex URL
52015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52017 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52025 \begin_layout Bibliography
52026 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52027 LatexCommand bibitem
52034 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52037 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52044 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52048 \begin_inset Newline newline
52052 \begin_inset Flex URL
52055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52057 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52065 \begin_layout Bibliography
52066 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52067 LatexCommand bibitem
52074 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52077 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52087 \begin_inset Index idx
52090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52091 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
52097 \begin_inset Newline newline
52101 \begin_inset Flex URL
52104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52106 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52114 \begin_layout Bibliography
52115 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52116 LatexCommand bibitem
52123 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52126 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52131 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52137 \begin_inset Index idx
52140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52147 \begin_inset Newline newline
52151 \begin_inset Flex URL
52154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52156 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52164 \begin_layout Bibliography
52165 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52166 LatexCommand bibitem
52173 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52176 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52186 \begin_inset Newline newline
52190 \begin_inset Flex URL
52193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52195 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52203 \begin_layout Bibliography
52204 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52205 LatexCommand bibitem
52206 key "makeindex-man"
52212 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52215 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
52225 \begin_inset Newline newline
52229 \begin_inset Flex URL
52232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52234 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
52242 \begin_layout Bibliography
52243 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52244 LatexCommand bibitem
52251 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52254 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
52264 \begin_inset Newline newline
52268 \begin_inset Flex URL
52271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52273 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
52281 \begin_layout Bibliography
52282 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52283 LatexCommand bibitem
52290 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52293 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52298 عن حزمة AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52300 \begin_inset Newline newline
52304 \begin_inset Flex URL
52307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52309 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52317 \begin_layout Bibliography
52318 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52319 LatexCommand bibitem
52326 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52329 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52334 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52340 \begin_inset Index idx
52343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52344 حزمة لتيك ! caption
52350 \begin_inset Newline newline
52354 \begin_inset Flex URL
52357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52359 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52367 \begin_layout Bibliography
52368 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52369 LatexCommand bibitem
52376 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52379 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52384 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52390 \begin_inset Index idx
52393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52394 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
52400 \begin_inset Newline newline
52404 \begin_inset Flex URL
52407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52409 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52417 \begin_layout Bibliography
52418 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52419 LatexCommand bibitem
52426 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52429 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52434 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52440 \begin_inset Index idx
52443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52444 حزمة لتيك ! fancyhdr
52450 \begin_inset Newline newline
52454 \begin_inset Flex URL
52457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52459 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52467 \begin_layout Bibliography
52468 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52469 LatexCommand bibitem
52476 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52479 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52484 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52490 \begin_inset Index idx
52493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52494 حزمة لتيك ! hyperref
52500 \begin_inset Newline newline
52504 \begin_inset Flex URL
52507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52509 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52517 \begin_layout Bibliography
52518 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52519 LatexCommand bibitem
52526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52529 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
52534 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52540 \begin_inset Index idx
52543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52544 حزمة لتيك ! microtpye
52550 \begin_inset Newline newline
52554 \begin_inset Flex URL
52557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52559 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
52567 \begin_layout Bibliography
52568 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52569 LatexCommand bibitem
52576 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52579 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
52584 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52590 \begin_inset Index idx
52593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52594 حزمة لتيك ! nomencl
52600 \begin_inset Newline newline
52604 \begin_inset Flex URL
52607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52609 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
52617 \begin_layout Bibliography
52618 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52619 LatexCommand bibitem
52626 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52629 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
52634 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52640 \begin_inset Index idx
52643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52644 حزمة لتيك ! prettyref
52650 \begin_inset Newline newline
52654 \begin_inset Flex URL
52657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52659 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
52667 \begin_layout Bibliography
52668 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52669 LatexCommand bibitem
52676 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52679 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
52684 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52690 \begin_inset Index idx
52693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52694 حزمة لتيك ! refstyle
52700 \begin_inset Newline newline
52704 \begin_inset Flex URL
52707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52709 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
52717 \begin_layout Bibliography
52718 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52719 LatexCommand bibitem
52726 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52729 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
52734 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52736 \begin_inset Newline newline
52740 \begin_inset Flex URL
52743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52745 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
52753 \begin_layout Bibliography
52754 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52755 LatexCommand bibitem
52762 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52765 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
52770 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52772 \begin_inset Newline newline
52776 \begin_inset Flex URL
52779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52781 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
52789 \begin_layout Bibliography
52790 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52791 LatexCommand bibitem
52800 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52803 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
52810 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52811 للكتابة بالسيريلية:
52812 \begin_inset Newline newline
52816 \begin_inset Flex URL
52819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52821 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
52829 \begin_layout Bibliography
52830 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52831 LatexCommand bibitem
52838 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52841 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
52846 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52848 \begin_inset Newline newline
52852 \begin_inset Flex URL
52855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52857 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
52865 \begin_layout Bibliography
52866 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52867 LatexCommand bibitem
52874 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52877 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
52882 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52884 \begin_inset Newline newline
52888 \begin_inset Flex URL
52891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52893 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
52901 \begin_layout Bibliography
52902 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52903 LatexCommand bibitem
52910 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52913 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
52918 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52919 للكتابة باليابانية:
52920 \begin_inset Newline newline
52924 \begin_inset Flex URL
52927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52929 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
52937 \begin_layout Standard
52938 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52974 \begin_inset Note Note
52977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52986 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
52987 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
52988 bibliography is the second one:
52996 \begin_layout Standard
52997 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
52998 LatexCommand bibtex
52999 btprint "btPrintCited"
53000 bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs"
53001 options "../biblio/alphadin"
53008 \begin_layout Standard
53009 ثبت المراجع في الأعلى تم إنشاءه من قاعدة بيانات Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53013 \begin_layout Standard
53017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53023 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53032 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53042 \begin_inset Note Note
53045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53048 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53049 \begin_inset space ~
53053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53055 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53067 \begin_layout Standard
53068 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53069 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53075 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53076 LatexCommand printindex